<<

SHUTTLE VEHICLE AND MISSION

SIMULATION REQUIREMENTS REPORT

VOLUME III

^20/72 SHUTTLE VEHICLE AND MISSION

SIMULATION REQUIREMENTS REPORT

VOLUME III

10/20/72. '

•-/•' V JJ. F. Burke Principal Investigator SMS Definition Study

This document is submitted in compliance with Line Item No. 2 of the Data Requirements List as Type I Data, Contract WAS 9-12836

SINGER COMPANY SIMULATION PRODUCTS' DIVISION SHUTTLE VEHICLE AND MISSION SIMULATION REQUIREMENTS REPORT

VOLUME III

Prepared by:

M:Burke Principal Investigator SMS Definition Study

Approved by:

C. Olasky NASA Technical Manager

Contracting Officer This document is submitted in compliance with Line Item No. 2 of the Data Requirements List as Type I Data, Contract NAS 9-12836

SINGER COMPANY SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

PREFACE

This document is submitted in compliance with Line Item No. 2 of the

Data Requirements List as Type I Data, Contract NAS9-12836. The document

is divided into four volumes for ease of handling. The contents of

each volume is defined as:

Volume I: Includes sections entitled Introduction, Mission

Envelope and Flight Dynamics which correspond to

Sections 1.0, 2.0 and 3.0 of the Table of Contents.

Volume II: Includes sections entitled Introduction and Shuttle

Vehicle Systems which correspond to sections 1.0 an

4.0 to 4.18 of the Table of Contents.

Volume III: Includes sections entitled Introduction and Shuttle

Vehicle Systems which correspond to sections 1.0 and

4.19 to 4.22 of the Table of Contents.

Volume IV: Includes sections entitled External Interfaces, Crew

Prodedures, Crew Station, Visual Cues and Aural

Cues which correspond to sections 5.0, 6.0, 7.0,

8.0 and 9.0 of the Table of Contents. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION ii

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 Introduc t ion 2.0 Mission Envelope 2.1 Space Missions 2.1.1 Launch Phase 2.1.2 Orbit and Deorbit Phases 2.1.3 Entry and Landing Phases 2.1.4 Payloads, Deploy and Retrieval 2.1.5 Preference Missions 2.1.5.1 Vertical Tests 2.1.5.2 Easterly Launch 2.1.5.3 Resupply 2.1.5.4 South Polar 2.1.6 Timelines 2.1.7 Aborts 2.1.7.1 Pad and Low Altitude 2.1.7.2 Return to Site (unpowered) 2.1.7.3 Return to Site (powered) 2.1.7.4 Once-Around Orbit 2.1.7.5 To Orbit Degraded Mission 2.1.7.6 Booster Powered Glide Return 2.1.8 7 Mission Operations

2.1.8.1 Staging 2.1.8.2 Drop Tank Maneuver

2.1.8.3 IMU Alignment THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 11L 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

2.1.844 Rendezvous

2.1.8.5 Docking

2.1.8.6 Payload Deployment

2.1.8.7 Payload Retrieval

2.1.8.8 Deorbit

2., 1.8.9 Entry

2.1.8.10 Hypersonic-Supersonic Transition

2.1.8.11 Energy Management

2.1.8.12 Cruise

2.1.8.13 Landing and Rollout

2.2 Atmospheric Flights

2.2.1 Horizontal Flight Test

2.2.2 Ferry Flights

3.0 Flight Dynamics

3.1 Vehicle Configurations

3.1.1 Operational Space Mission Configuration

3.1.1.1 OrbiterVehicle

3.1.1.2 Payload

3.1.1.3 Solid Rocket Motors

3.1.1.3.1 156" Booster SRM

3.1.1.3.2 156" Rocket Separation SRM's

3.1.1.3.3 Abort SRM's

3.1.1.3.4 External Tank Deorbit SRM

3.1.1.4 External Tank DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION IV

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

3.1.1.5 Air Breathing Engines 3.1.1.6 OMS Engines 3.1.1.7 RCS 3.1.1.8 Docked Configurations 3.1.2 Operational Ferry Mission Configuration 3.1.3 Horizontal Test Configuration 3.1.4 Vertical Test Configuration 3.2 Equations of Motion 3.2.1 Coordinate Systems 3.2.2 Translational Equations of Motion 3.2.2.1 Forces 3.2-.2.1.1 Earth -Gravitational 3.2.2.1.2 Other Celestial Body Gravitational 3.2.2.1.3 Dynamic Body Forces 3.2.2.1.4 Payload Forces 3.2.2.1.5 Docking Effects 3.2.2.1.6 StagingJEffects 3.2.2.1.7 Venting and Dumping 3.2.2.2 Trajectory Calculation Requirements 3.2.2.2.1 Orbiter 3.2.2.2.2 Target Vehicles 3.2.2.3 Relative Translational States 3.2.2.4 Accuracy 3.2.3 Rotational Equations of Motion 3.2,3.1 Moments THE SINGER COMPANY DATE IQ/2Q/72 PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION V

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW.YORK REP. NO. 3.2.3.1.1 Dynamic Body Moments 3.2.3.1.2 Payload Moments 3.2.3.1.3 Docking Effects 3.2.3.1.4 Staging Effects 3.2.3.1.5 Venting and Dumping 3.2.S..2 Rotational State Calculation .Requirements

3.2.3.4 Accuracy 3.3 Mass Properties 3»3.1 Orbiter 3.3*2 Solid Rocket Motors • »- - 3.3.3 External Tanks 3.3.4 Payload f' 3.3.5 ABES 3.3.6 Ferry ABES 3.3.7 Total Vehicles 3.3.7.1 Operational Space Vehicle 3.3.7.2 Operational Ferry 3.3.7.3 HFTS 3.3.7.4 VFT 3.3.8 Retrieval Satellites 3.3.9 Deployed Satellites

3.3.10 Space Station 3.4 Aerodynamic Characteristics 3.4.1 General Requirements DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

3.4.2 Aerodynamic Flight Regimes 3.4.2.1 Launch and Abort 3.4.2.2 Orbital Flight 3.4.2.3 Orbiter Only 3.5 Ephemeris 3.5.1 Celestial Bodies .(stars.., .moon, ,sun, ..planets,) 3.5.2 Coordinate Transformations (IM to IEO 4.0 Shuttle Vehicle System 4.1 Electrical Power 4.1.1 Electrical Power Distribution and Control (EPDC) 4.1.2 Power Distribution Equipment Description 4.1.2.1 Generator Control Units (GCU) 4.1.2.2 Power Contactors 4.1.2.3 Inverters 4.1.2.4 Transformer - Rectifiers (TR) 4.1.2.5 Battery Charger 4.1.2.6 Remote Power Controllers (RPC) 4.1.2.7 Sequencers 4.1.2.8 Interior Lighting 4.1.2.9 Exterior Lighting 4.1.2.10 Fuel Cell System 4.1.3 Electrical Power Operational Characteristics 4.1.4 Functional Interfaces and Support Requirements

4.1.4.1 Data Control and Management (DCMO DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION VII

REV. BIMGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.1.4.2 Displays and Controls (D&C) 4.1.4.3 Electrical Povrer Generation (EPG) • 4.1.4.4 Electrical System Pov?er Losses 4.1.4.5 Environmental Control Life Support (ECLS) Interface 4.1.4.6 Power Utilization Subsystems 4.1.4.7 Support Equipment GSE 4.1.4.8 Payload 4.1.4.9 Space Station Interface 4.2 Mechanical Power 4.2.1 Auxllliary Power Units (AFU) 4.2.2 Hydraulic Power System 4.3 Main Propulsion Subsystem (MPS) 4c3.1 Engine 4.3.2 Control/Monitor System 4.3.2.1 Engine Thrust/Mixture Ratio 4.3.2.2 Engine Monitoring 4.3.2.3 SSME Controller Data Flow 4.3.3 SSI'S Operation Details 4.3.3.1 SSME Sequence Schedule 4.3.3.1.1 Engine Start 4.3.3.1.2 Engine Shutdown 4.3.3.2 SSi'IE Flight Operations Monitoring and Continuous In-Flight Test 4.3.3.3 Data Trenscicsion 4.3.3.4 Controller Build-In Test DATfO/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION Vlll

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.3.3.4.1 Computer Checkout 4.3.3.4.2 Computer Interface Electronics Checkout • 4.3.3.4.3 Input Electronics Checkout 4.3.3.4.4 Output Electronics Checkout 4.3.3.4.5 Power Supply Electronics Checkout 4:3.3.5 Sensor Build-In Test 4.3.3.5.1 Sensor Ground Checkout 4.3.3.5.2 Sensor In-Flight Monitoring 4.3.3.6 Actuator/Valve Build-In Test 4.3.3.7 Spark Igniter Built-in Test 4.3.4 Instrumentation Parameter List 4.3.4.1. Alternate Performance Control Parameters 4.3.5 Engine Actuator 4,3.5.1 Operating Characteristics 4.4 Reaction Control Subsystem 4.4.1 Configuration 4.4.2 Thruster Description 4.4.3 Propellant Tankage 4.4.4 Pressurisation Subsystem 4.4.5 RCS Operation 4.5 Orbital Maneuvering Subsystem (OMS) 4.5.1 C^IS Configuration 4.5.2 Engine 4.5.3 Tankage- DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.5.4 Pressurization 4.5.5 Installation 4.5.6 Environmental Control 4.5.7 Maintenance 4.5.3 Operations 4..6 .Air.br.e£.thing .Propulsion .Subsystem (ABES) 4.6.1 Configuration 4.6.2 Fuel Tank 4.6.3 Ferry Configuration 4.6.4 Operation 4.7 Solid Rocket Motion (SRM) 4.7.1 Main-SRM 4.7.2 Abort Solid Rocket Motor 4.7.3 Deorbit SRM for External Tank (ET) 4.8 External Tank Subsystem (ET) 4.8.1 Structure 4.8.2 Thermal Protection System (IPS) 4.8.3 Deorbit Motor 4.8.4 Avionics 4.8.4.1 Instrumentation 4.8.4.2 Separation 4.3*4.2.1 Electrical Pox^er 4.8.4.2.2 Interface 4.9 Guidance, Navigation and Control (Less Computer) DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION X

REV. B INCH AMION, NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.^0 Communications and Tracking 4.10.1 S-Bsnd System 4.10.1.1 S°Band Voice 4.10.1.2 S-Band T/M 4.10.1.3 Command Data 4.10.1.4 Video Link 4.10.1.5 Wide Bank Data Link 4.10.1.6 Range Measurement 4.10.2 VHP System 4.10.3 UHF System 4.10.4' Audio Control Center 4.10.5 TACAN 4.10.6 Radar Altimeter 4.10.7 ATC Transponder (ATCRBS) 4.10.8 Instrument Landing System (ILS) 4.10.9 GCA Radar 4.10.10 Air Route Surveillance Radar 4.10.11 Precision Ranging System (PRS)

4.10.12 Microwave Landing System (MLS) DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW-YORK REP. NO.

4.11 Operational Instrumentation 4.11.1 Recorders 4.11.2 Sensors and Signal Conditioning 4.11.3 Ground Support Equipment PCM Links 4.11.4 Caution and Warning System 4.12 Environmental Control and Life Support Subsystem (ECLS) 4.12.1 Atmospheric Revitalization 4.12.1.1 Pressure Control 4.12.1.2 Cabin Humidity, C02» Odor, and Temperature Control 4.12.2 Life Support 4.12.2.1 Food Management 4.12.2.2. Waste Management 4.12.2.3 Personal Hygiene 4.12.2.4 Fire Detection and Extinguishing 4.12.2.5 Extravehicular/Intravehicular Service and Recharge Station and Airlock 4.12.3 Thermal Control 4.12.3.1 Coolant Loops 4.12.3.2 Heat Sinks 4.12.3.3 Water Management 4.12.4 Fault Detection Management 4.12.5 Ground and Launch Operations 4.12.6 Cabin Noise Level 4.12.7 Corrosion and Contamination Control 4.13 Psyload Accor:::iodation:;System DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION Xll

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.13.1 Structural/Mechanical Interfaces 4.13.1.1 General Structural Attachment 4.13.1.2 Payload Deployment and Retrieval Mechanism 4.13.1.3 Paylosd Control/Display Panels 4.13.2 Propulsive System Fluid Interfaces 4.13.3 Electrical/Instrumentation Interfaces 4.13.4 Payload Avionics Signal Interface 4.13.5 Payload Environment Control 4.13.6 Paylocd Doors 4.13.7 Rendezvous and Docking Sensors 4.13.8 Payload Dedicated Recorder 4.13.9 Payload Handling Station 4.13.10 Payload Bay Lighting 4.14 Crew Station Instrumentation System 4.15 Gn~Bosrd Computers 4.15.1 GN&C Computer 4.15.2 Payload Monitor System Computer *-=*, 4.15.3 Operational Instrumentation Computer .,15.4 Main Engine Computer 4.16 Kiccellansous Systems 4.16.1 Purge and Vent System 4.16.2 Lasdinc/E-rsking System 4.16.3 Glide Brake System

4.16.4 Ejection Seat Mechanism 4.16.5 Docking Kcchsnism DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.17 Onboard Computer System THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 PAGE NO. XIV SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.18 GN&C Onboard Computer and Interface Systems Requirements 4.18.1 GN&C General Functional Description 4.18.2 GN&C System Elements & Interfaces 4.18.2.1 Air Data Equipment 4.18.2.2 Rate and Accelerometer Sensors 4.18.2.3 IMU 4.18.2.4 Star Tracker System

4el802.5 Horizon Sensor 4.18.2.6 Analog S.A.S. • 4.18.2.7 TVC Electronics -.4.18.2.8 APS Logic Drive Unit . ., .. . . 4.18.2.9 GN&C Computer Interface

40l8.2.9.1 Computer Data Acquisition £ Data Conversion 4ol8.2-.9o2 Remote Multiplexing Unit

4.18.2.9.3 Input Buffer . , . , , . ' , ; 4.18.2.9.4 Output Decoder 4.18.3 GN&C Computer ' 4.18.4 Orbiter GN&C Operational Plight Program 4.18.5 Rational

4018.6 Assumptions

4.l80'7 Data References DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION XV

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.19 MDE 4.19'.l General Function ':/ ' - ' 4.19.2 System Operation and Interfaces 4.19.2.1 Display Unit

4.19.2.2 Keyboard

4.19-'2 .3 10B Adapter

4.19.2.4 Keyboard Adapter 4.19.2.5 Symbol Generator 4.19.2.6 PCM Adapter 4.19.2.7 Processor CPU-I/0 4.19.2.8 Lamp Buffer Adapter 4.19.2.9 System Operation

4 19-3 MDE Computer ' :

4.19.4 MDE Software & Systems Applications

4.19.4.1 MDE Computer Software

4.19.4.2 GN&C MDE System Application

4.19.4.2.1 GN&CDisplay Systems Software

4.19.4.2.2 GN&C Performing Monitoring Software

4.19.4.3 Performance Monitor System

4.19.4.4 Payload System

4.19-5 Rationale

4.19-6 Assumptions

4.19.7 Data References DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION XVI

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

1-4.20 Main Engine Controller 4.20.1 Controller Design Requirements 4.20.2 Controller Design Description 4.20.3 Controller Interfaces •4.£Q.,4 .Controller Hardware 4.20.5 Controller Software 4.21 Thermal Protection System 4.22 Thermal Control System

5.0 External Interfaces 5.1 Display & Controls (D&C) Consoles 5.2 Universal Control System (UCS) 5.3 Command Acquisition Unit 5.4 Remote Interface Unit 5.5 Shuttle Vehicle Systems Interfaces' DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

6.0 Crew Procedures 6.1 Mission Objectives 6.1.1 Ascent

6.1.2 Rendezvous 6.1.3 Orbit 6.1.4 Payload Operations 6.1.5 Return 6.1.6 Ferry Operations 6.1.7 Abort Operations

6.2 Requirements for Crew Participation 6.3 Task Requirements *•• - 6.3.1 Commander and Pilot 6.3.2 Mission Specialist

6.3.3 Payload Specialist 6.4 Work Station Intra-Relationship DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

8.0 Visual Cues 8.1 The Human Visual System - Some Observations 8.1.1 Introduction

8.1.2 Visual Simulation System Parameters 8.1.2.1 Field of View 8.1.2.2 Brightness 8.1.2.3 Contrast 8.1.2.4 Resolution 8.1.2.5 Color

8.1.2.6 References 8.2 Windows . 8.2.1 Description , . ' " ' '• t • ' 8.2.2 Field of View 8.2.2.1 Forward Windows ...':. 8.2.2.2 Payload Handling Station . I 8.2.3 Assumptions 8.3 Ascent Phase (Vertical Launch to Orbit Insertion) 8.3.1 Scene Content 8.3.1.1 Horizon . 8.3.1.2 Terrain 8.3.1.3 Celestial Bodies 8.3.1.4 Own Vehicle 8.3.1.5 Atmospheric Effects 8.3.2 Color DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

8.3.3 Illuminators/Non-Illuminators

8.3.4 Displacement 8.3.4.1 Translation

8.3.4.2 Rotation

8.3.5 Velocity 8.3.5.1 Translation

8.3.5.2 Rotation 8.3.6 Acceleration 8.3.6.1 Translation 8.3.6.2 Rotation

8.3.7 Assumptions 8.4 Abort Phase (Vertical Launch)

8.4.1 Scene Content 8.4.1.1 Horizon 8.4.1.2 Terrain 8.4.1.3 Celestial Bodies 8.4.1.4 Orbiting Vehicles 8.4.1.5 Own Vehicle

8.4.1.6 Atmospheric Effects 8.4.1.7 Other Aircraft 8.4.2 Color

8.4.3 Illuminators/Non-Illuminators

8.4.4 Displacements

8.4.4.1 Translation DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION XX

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

8.4.4.2 Rotation 8.4.5 Velocity 8.4.5.1 Translation 8.4.5.2 Rotation 8.4.6 Acceleration 8.4.6.1 Translation 8.4.6.2 Rotation 8.4.7 Assumptions 8.5 Orbital Operations

8.5.1 Scene Content 8.5.1.1 Horizon 8.5.1.2 Terrain 8.5.1.3 Celestial Bodies 8.5.1.4 Orbiting Vehicles 8.5.1.5 Own Vehicle 8.5.1.6 Atmospheric Effects 8.5.2 Color

8.5.3 IIluminators/Non-Illuminators 8.5.4 Displacement 8.5.4.1 Translation 8.5.4.2 Rotation

8.5.5 Velocity 8.5.5.1 Translation

8.5.5.2 Rotation THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. XXI 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

8.5.6 Acceleration 8.5.6.1 Translation 8.5.6.2 Rotation 8.5.7 Assumptions 8.6 High and Low Altitude Rendezvous Phase •8.6.1 Scene'Content 8.6.1.1 Horizon 8.6.1.2 Terrain 8.6.1.3 Celestial Bodies 8.6.1.4 Orbiting Vehicles 8.6.1.5 Atmospheric Effects 8.6.2 Color 8.6.3 Illuminators/Non-Illuminators 8.6.4 Displacement 8.6.4.1 Translation 8.6.4.2 Rotation

8.6.5 Velocity 8.6.5.1 Translation 8.6.5.2 Rotation 8.6.6 Acceleration 8.6.6.1 Translation 8.6.6.2 Rotation 8.7 Docking and Undocking Phase 8.7.1 Scene Content DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 PAGE NO. XXJL1 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

8.7.1.1 Horizon 8.7.1.2 Terrain 8.7.1.3 Celestial Bodies 8.7.1.4 Orbiting Vehicles

8.7.1.5 Atmospheric Effects 8.7.2 Color 8.7.3 Illuminators/Non-Illuminators 8.7.4 Displacement 8.7.4.1 Translation 8.7.4.2 Rotation ' 8.7.5 Velocity 8.7.5.1 Translation 8.7.5.2 Rotation 8.7.6 Acceleration 8.7.6.1 Translation 8.7.6.2 Rotation 8.8 Payload Operations Phase 8.8.1 Scene Content 8.8.1.1 Horizon 8.8.1.2 Terrain 8.8.1.3 Celestial Bodies 8.8.1.4 Orbiting Vehicles 8.8.1.5 Own Vehicle 8.8.1.5.1 Payload Bay Doors THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. xxiii 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

8.8.1.5.2 Remote Manipulator System 8.8.1.5.3 TV Cameras and Monitors 8.8.1.6 Atmospheric Effects 8.8.2 Color 8.8.3 Illuminators/Non-Illuminators 8.8.4 Displacement 8.8.4.1 Translation 8.8.4.2 Rotation 8.8.5 Velocity 8.8.5.1 Translation 8.8.5.2 Rotation 8.8.6 - Acceleration 8.8.6.1 Translation 8.8.6.2 Rotation 8.8.7 Assumptions 8.9 De-Orbit Phase 8.9.1 Scene Content 8.9.1.1 Horizon 8.9.1.2 Terrain 8.9.1.3 Celestial Bodies 8.9.1.4 Orbiting Vehicles 8.9.1.5 Atmospheric Effects 8.9.2 Color

8 9.3 Illuminators/Non-Illuminators THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE N0.xxiv SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

8.9.4 Displacement

8.9.4.1 Translation

8.9.4.2 Rotation

8.9.5 Velocity

8.9.5.1 Translation

'8:9.5/2 Rotation

8 9.6 Acceleration

8.9.6.1 Translation

8.9.6.2 Rotation

8.10 Entry

8.10.1 Scene Content

8.10.1.1 Horizon

8.10.1.2 Terrain ?--,~. ,....•-._

8.10.1.3 Celestial Bodies

8.10.1.4 Atmospheric Effects

8.10.2 Color

8.10.3 ~ Illuminators/Non-Illumtnators

8.10.4 Displacement

8.10.4.1 Translation

8.10.4.2 Rotation

8.10.5 Velocity

8.10.5.1 Translation

8.10.5.2 Rotation

8.10.6 Acceleration THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. XXV 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

8.10.6.1 Translation 8.10.6.2 Rotation 8.10.7 Assumptions 8.11 Approach and Landing Phase 8.11.1 Scene Content 8.11.1.1 Horizon 8.11.1.2 Terrain 8.11.1.3 Celestial Bodies

8.11.1.4 Atmospheric Effects 8.11.1.5 Other Aircraft 8.11.2 Color 8.11.3- Illuminators/Non-Illuminators •8.11.4 Displacements ~ ; 8.11.4.1 Translation 8.11.4.2 Rotation

8.11.5 Velocity *«,. 8.11.5.1 Translation 8.11.5.2 Rotation 8.11.6 Acceleration 8.11.6.1 Translation j i ! 8.11.6.2 Rotation ! j 8.11.7 Assumptions j 8.12 Ferry Flight Phase 8.12.1 Scene Content DAT. THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. "fo/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION XX VX

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK ' REP. NO.

8.12.1.1 Horizon '8.12.1.2 Terrain 8.12.1.3 Celestial Bodies 8.12.1.4 Other Aircraft 8.12.1.5 Own Aircraft 8.12.2 Color 8.12.3 Illuminators/Non-Illuminators 8.12.4 Displacement 8.12.4.1 Translation 8.12.4.2 Rotation 8.12.5 Velocity 8.12.5.1 Translation 8.12.5.2 Rotation 8.12.6 Acceleration 8.12.6.1 Translation 8.12.6.2 Rotation 8.12.7 Assumptions DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION XXV13.

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

9.0 Cue Requirements 9.1 Propulsion Cues 9.1.1 Main Rocket Engines 9.1.2 Solid Rocket Motors 9.1.3 Airbreathing Engines "9.1.4 Abort Solid Rocket Motors 9.2 System Equipment Cues 9.3 Aerodynamic Cues ', 9.4 Caution and Warning Cues 9.5 Landing Gear Cues 9-6 Malfunction Cues DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINgHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

1.0 Introduction , The objective of the Shuttle Vehicle and Mission Simulation Requirements report is to provide to NASA/MSC documentation of the requirements for faithful simulation of the Shuttle Vehicle, its systems, mission, operations and interfaces. To accomplish this objective the report was divided into eight topics which comprehensively cover the simulation requirements of the Shuttle mission and vehicle. The topics and their main objectives are summarized below. Miss i on Envelope - This topic covers the space and atmospheric missions that are envisioned for the Shuttle program. The characteristics of each mission are described by an analysis of the mission ! phases, trajectory information, timelines and operations for nominal and abort condi- - • • tions to the extent data was available. Orbiter Flight Dynamics - This topic covers the flight regimes xtfhich the Shuttle vehicle will encounter in the accomplishment of its missions. The requirements were established in the following manner. The vehicle configurations that must be simu-j I lated for horizontal and vertical test j j flights, operational space missions, atmospheri missions and abort modes were defined. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 1-2

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

The dynamics requirements were established by defining the forces and moments that will act on the vehicle during the entire mission envelope which include, propulsion, gravity, aerodynamic effects, payload effects, docking -effects, staging effects, ground reactions and the dumping of material overboard. The translational equations of motion requirement were established by defining the vehicles, ••;••-;-•* - satellites and payloads whose state vectors must be calculated and by defining the co- ordinate systems, relative equations of

__t motion and accuracy of the calculations. A similar analysis was performed for the rota- tional equations of motion. Mass property and ephemeris requirements were also identi- fied. Shu111e Vehicle Sys tems - The Shuttle vehicle systems required for simulation were identified and described. The descriptive data generated in this effort! , . ( was primarily based on the North American ! Shuttle proposal. The Shuttle vehicle and it]s i system configuration is currently in a state

of flux and therefore the descriptive data THE SINGER COMPANY DATE lQ/20/72 PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 1-3

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

contained in this report undoubtedly will become out of date as: the Shuttle program

progresses. However, for the purposes of this study, the data is more than adequate to define simulator requirements and a base- line -design when it -is tempered with the past experience of Apollo and Gemini programs. A cross correlation between the HR definition of systems and LRU's and this report is shown in Table 1-1 for reference purposes.

External Interfaces - The external interfaces of the Shuttle vehicle were identified and a preliminary type interface description established. Due

to the fact that for every external interface there also exists an equivalent on-board system, the descriptive data on the workings of the interfaces is contained in the Shuttle Vehicle Systems section of the report and cross references are provided in this sectior

i Crew Procedures - The actual crew procedures for the Shuttle j : system will not be available for many years. | As a result the study concentrated on identi-

fying tasks by mission phase and crew member and identifying the probable interfaces be-

tween work stations. The data used for the DATE lQ/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. .. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

analysis was a RTOP study by MacDonald- Douglas, conversations with George Franklin of NASA/MSC, past experience, and the re- quirements of the Shuttle vehicle & mission. Crew Station The latest available data at the time of the •writing

Visual Cues The visual scene content was established for each of the mission phases. Attributes of the scene elements, to the extent feasible, were established and will be further defined in the SMSR report. The vehicle window con- j

figuration is not defined at this time but ( I the best data available was utilized. The ji accelerations, velocites and displacements were established to the extent possible. Son THE SINGER COMPANY DATEJ.O/20/72 PAGE NO. 1-5 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGKAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

dynamics data was not available such as in

the Abort phases of the mission. The missing

information will be incorporated if it be-

comes available when the time frame and

ground rules of the study or assumptions will

be made.

Aural Cues The aural cues requirements associated with

the mission and vehicle systems were identified

and described. Detailed data on the charac-

teristics of each sound was not available

and probably will not be until the vehicle

test program is in progress. This factor car.

be circumvented by specifying flexibility

into the simulator aural cue equipment.

This report will be updated at the end of the study based on data

received as of January 1, 1972.

Reference to^study data sources are included in the margins and

the text in order to facilitate update of this report. The numerical

references are correlated with the data listing defined by Table 1-2. THE SINGER DATE 10/20/72 COMPANY PAGE N0. 1-g •5iMi.ii AT|n,M ppnnuCTS PIVIS ON

REV. . BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK ' • REP. NO.

1 !

Qi , Q^ • i E "0 CO CO- CU CJ o 4-> S- u_ CO O •«- c^ C 3 o CT <^- r— r— • 10 O) • r r— • to QJ S- 1 O O c: 0 u_ • 'f~ o. * o •a co . • c 0 ^ •^-s^ O c: a. 3 ~O Q Q c C o E f^ T3 j^^ o • ^ 3 •o cu <_> t^ •o '^fr* 1/1 CU C t/) Q 4-> ^CJ QJ f-fl* 1 to QJ CO ~^ C o cu to ro * ,«=C ,a_» s; .cr . .to 3 j CM -o E co QJ 3 O CD cu 10 ca a; c O 0 ii c • CD QJ (X CM O i*^ ! 3 i o i _, j 2 !?^ ^^_ . o • CO r- r~~ jQ r- IT) ^> XX NX i 1i **- r— ri •o to i— tO CM I ^_> QJ CO cu co CO *3 QJ O o i -o r— •o 0 r-^ 10 CJ O CU CD O 0 u_ r— •i — pa 3 Q. O Q. CU in i ! r$ s: CO s: CU CO l/l co •o •a r— f o UJ r— r— , o et 5\3 Q) t3 ^— "O r— E "Es !! P— r™ i—- ^*~ V& X> CU cu c CU i co QJ CO QJ Q> CO O tO 2 CO S- s_ ! s 00 CO >> a> I « CO OJ cO CO CU CO 1 CD i Q L Q QJ 1 c: Q 0 H- 0 C 4-> E c: C S c i C C i~ O co 0 •r— 10 HO. O O O o t c! re Q co co i 21 J ZE '. 31 eo t— UJ ex 5 c. a. o- COr— UJ i— 4-> CTT- Q • CCh- o: l- - 0 D- C r-4 CO CO DC J 21 - co s- " o 2: c; W uj «3 E CQ H- >;=: co ;- ^"*< — -j ; — ^ i £"^ *T~ < 0 0 •) t • i i CO cn cn cr* cn cn cn cn cn co cn cn cn cn cn • * * * _' * • ° • ' ____* * * •r-i- i UJ

C

0 ^ i ; f~- o c • 5 s_ 0 E OJ i- OJ 4J cn c •4_) I/) •r™ CO ca o U oo '•• c. >^ QJ C-) (U •=c ; ZD t— 4 • o v^ r— 01 to r— o a. CO s- co UJ S- ' 5- C^D^ a. fO Q. o QJ >. ("y^ r~~ >— < +J 3 O oo > j_ •^»^ *f -^ i- -p CO ^_ •I— o c: i O ex. S- 0 s- cu V- h— o o c^ c/) QJ J- a •4-^ CO Q ^m C c M- U QJ • r— (O i— C i • ' UJ QJ O 3 C' (_ 3 0 c I o SI —£_ CO co "O O^ 0 CO O O g >• UJ a. ^> r— QJ t/> a. Q i— n3 H ^ M ^~" K— *—* ^_ r cu r— C ^5 Q i * ~ H "*****• CO n> (O 4_> CD fO rz> ID o S_ CO C s_ R j_ S co >— o- (O C S- ^. •r- Q- QJ jj o e s: oo UJ co a: •—• i— t h- ea; s: •zi | rn I o . . • A 1 ^ •• p DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. , _ 10//U//Z ^IMMLAT ON PRnniirj^ P|V|S ON , •"-''

REV. BINGHAMTCN. NEW YORK ' ' REP. NO. Sj

00 oo <_) g c_> u. H 00 oo P n o o ^~ r— ' i in t 1 E 'o o u. |j 4J CL o a. B •4-J ^c •r— c • ft O i^_ ^ » o 1/5 (: £Z O_ c 1 * i S- o o -a _C I fO cn ! •a in •o •r— s cu i/i cu ~^ r— i *^^ i/) €-^- 4- { t- 3 •^^^ "2 ^o r cu CM TD cn LO f V) ^p!^ A • CU ,. f* CO -V ^ i CO ^^ cr 3 -i— CNJ i- CNJ . c | oo C3 rs CD E i s. CQ cu CQ CD cu E CU o ~-^ D: cu 5 ,__ , r— OO J3 J3 s i CO LU cu CU rO S_ 03 to • O CNI «3- 1 c_? *^3 "O i— O r— f— ; r^ r*~ •z. O 0 »i^- **— 'r~ O- C3 t ^r *~D U. UJ g^ •a > t> i LU f—^. p— fO cu •M * Q 4_> 0 0 Q_ ^ ^ ^ (O CU (O 2: o oo ^J 1 >^ ^^ Q JO ~O CNJ OJ GJ oo 0) CU Q 1 ^ I Q 1 oo c c so* s: o >•* c C 2 o o o O 0 O OSQ.fi O CO ^ CQ 0 o nB n: "Z. )— r^" ZZ | eC | H;: i—i oo t— l zc 1 . ^^ o "'• t— i r. UJ aL t—i -.c: T*^ c. a; C' (O r— UJ J- -^ CT-r- T ° »— -z. OO , 00 1 5 CXJ Lo cr> CTl cn CTl cn ai r-' LU «=!-' «^-' ^d-' • •^ » CJ rpqj ft^jn-K^-jr ^ ^ ^ ^ O_ c; CO UJ OO ---

00 oo ^ CNI r— o-. O- c^- l°i - •*-^ f : -,

••

o 1 cu c J- en 0 cu O (O ^_ «j_> _*y? in C- t. s_ 1 * CU •r— n3 in o {j o CU j— S- cu r— oo nj cu c: ID 00 o cu «l— Q. ^~ cu CU 0 c 1— 1 c LU E r— TJ c_ s_ fO •^" o S- cr 0 fO CU QJ a. a. o 2: a> CL O) S- U CU • 4~> 1 — 1 — ^ oo • cu S- OO CJ CX "N^^ o h— ^s£ •^^ «r— c. S- fO UJ O • | 1 UJ ^^ ^_> 4_> O, Q >, i- fI3 ^3 o £_ "^N^ CJ 1 — »—« cu o O -^ y o o 03 CD ( — 1 ^D oo OO u i- JD C S- 0 0 $- cu O ^£ oo cr D_ o 01 3 0 >> fO . (X3 S- Q 0 oo LU OO <_> CD 0- CQ h- LU cf a. u. u- i DATE ,0 /9n/79 • THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 1M Q 10/20/72 <;|MiiL4TI<~iN pRnpnry^ DIVI^ nf\j J-^o

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

1 —— i ' i !

|__ CM l~ t—t ri 5 1 n: ._ — S» co CO! Q T3 1— 1-1 Z. C d h- i— i f—Ijj j ^ ra LU — 1 z. ;^ffi (~) " l o ^~^ ro!' LU CM O ^* SI crT O o Q Qfl CJ CO LU Lull _J (_J CM _J 1— 1 i •=Csj ID 1 M z. 1— 1 1 LU LUJSI Q 1 3^ LU CD * CO r> CD a: ° l i O O >— *~^ 0 CJ§| . o e3^ CD 1— t 1—13 ct: j OL \ fV ~T" CJ I/) h- t— 3 LU | a. Q. LU LUijj CD i •V CO S- E: 1 ct: 1 §IJ ^ 1 CD •z. 'o' LU o LU i LU £ CD 5 CM _J > X -H ^£ ^t CO I— t^ Q-. Q 1 ^^ LU ^3 Q J 2j S i ^> ^> ^> LU • ^£ L^U^ i ^t or o CO LU • CO CJ o CD 2: 1—5! 0 i— i Q. LO et 0 IDS 0 • DC •z =C I1 cj o]l co gl § i— co :1 CM >—i 0 «*»— ! 1— e Z. LU oZ . ^— • r i ID c. a; i*v fV ry" ; fy ~ ^ •' ,fl3r— ct: a: fy^ — r C^ ct: a: a: 1 1 1 i- 4-* LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU li | LU "• '» *^F* C"""^~ 3: "^- !S 3: *-^ *jS —1 Q O o 0 O O CD CD 0 O 0 o O CQ c£ O- cu QL. a. Q- Q. a. n. a. D- f— o a2. ^c: 1 _j _J i 1 1 1 i __i i _j 1 cj^ «^ c^ CQ

LU i— i |— i Lu o: i— i 1—1 LU SI 1— o: o; CJ LU ^> ~-fy 0 H* h- LU LU CD 1 0- i— i • cc: 1— < 1 C£ o : l-A1 iJ 1 •— ^ — * _J ^3 h— 1 0 0 a: 5 oc Lu fv^ C£ LU cy , CJ ^C^J _J t — 1 t—i h- ^>~ LU X 1—1 0 UJ § b O CO o LU ' 1. 1— LU _J LU u_ CD b o; O CO LU 0 fy ct: z. 1 a. UJ 0 a: 1— UJ ^ {v| a LU LU •z. • |^ re CO cc a; ^* o o CO a: h- _J O 1 1 £~ o C£ CJ Q_ LU J^ S i '* CD a: LU _J ; ^_ ce: LU Lu LU I— z..- O 0 LU <"V 1 xx • LlJ ce: LU Ct 9 t~ Q- •'• co h- ce: j— 1 ! f 1 LU O

REV. . BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

1 . i i .•

0 1 ! LU i 1 v— t 1 1 1 • Of- 1 Q iP\ ia \ 1 J2 1 1 CO • 'LU *^«=> 3!! £ fO j £ CO \ ^ » 1 "^ LU LU o| i 1 1 co 1 CO LU | CQ CQ 1 I1t 1 J 1 a: 0 «=C CQ o | LU «=c CM I 1 UJ 3 l— i l — i _J l DC O 1— 1 UJ Q. > > ol 1 . LU CO 1 jj f^ t fi CO 1 — I ! UJ f>* c^f ex. e^ oo ; *> ^ ! O ^| —^ | — i a. fs^J ! 1 CO Q O ; CO O 0 0 • 0 O O CD O o § CM ro • , 0 •mil n •! ••••! CO y i too |t 1oo CO co 1 — 1 — 1 t~~ UJ • h- h- l— 1 1 1 LU 5 oo ^_ .Ci. ~~^ ^i *~^' ^~^ >- '< ~~i 1 Q- ^ ^ oo ^ 1 1— 1 .c fy 1 a: o: a: o: ^3 c. a; LU LU LU LU a: LU r^ -TOi — ^ij LU LU ! • O o O CD 3 O D- O- Q. O- CQ Q Q. O SP Du >_ ^- C£ i- ^ >- >- ^« ^- r~~ c^ f0~O o; ry^ a: c

Q_ a; i. ' CO LU CO fj I cau. |— i \ «*• •=!• •vl" ^- 00 CO I « E! § !

a: : LU o .. '• i Du co : 1— r F 1— H : O 1 — 1

§ UJ Oi oo : i- "T~ ^ "^ ^* LU Q- s O o CD s: a LU NyX R o. ^(— ^~ SI e£ a. OL H ^^ ~T" , ^_ LU o * UJ \ — 1 X 4^ 2 M s: LU i z ;ID 1 LU Q- j_ i i— i o: i— t DC LU r— Q Q CO X _i r— cr rD LU LU _l 00 LU m rc rc ' DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 . PAGE NO. 1.1Q

REV. 8IN.3HA.M7Cr,'. NEW YORK REP. NO.

1 •ii

• _1 _J -_j LU _J O f- o O ! i — i e^>t r~\ CO 3 0 Q LU LU rv* CJ o; O DC "Z. *•— ^ o O LU 1 i l 1S 1 OL LU n o| CJ UJ LU LU 0- LU CO w ^" 0 CJ LJ_ . to CJ 5 h— t ^y •z. j -tLU JIB: fu_ "21 ;CO E •("" LU LU CC. i- LU 08 1— i i — i *-*• 1 O h— i 1—1 CJ ^~^ CJ Q . CO p^ I f } 1 —' CO ±£ CO c co LUF CC O i o O O eC O _J i OL Q. re CD CJ o ol 2: re >- «^ re >- h- 1 UJ 0 >- CJ < CJ _l rr>| CD LU et LU O- CO LU LU h- 1— 1 LU 7T. LU •z. •z. co e "Z. O r n «D- ** f^ i— i s • • LU co •\ oi uj /"^ Q "Z e=C Q Q x 1 "Si ' CJ Q LU —if \- 2T LU LU UJ LU f Cu i— i ~z. co 1 1 o •=£ 1 — «^ *^ 1 >- 1 i — i 1 ^^ I— «=C ZD o C£I ID a: . CO LU _I LU 1— I . rr> LU D- : o (— -z {— •z. \— O- h- >- _j 5 oo i—< u^ o g| i LU O CO CtL »*^^! _i 1 Q s: Q H-* t— i rt ft f ; f— ^r Cy* I— 052: ^>* ^£ CsL f— 1 1— 1 1— ( >- i CD rD LU «=C D- 6 ID Lf> m s: c_> Lu O ^t f ' CO Lu co j ; =0; § co — - co — oo Q (/) "^ ^ Sf i Z § CO LU 1 t i 1. r —1 2: "~Ti CD CQ O i ""•C i — i ct - 1— LU ! _J -C O CD C. (L i 1— ^~ 1 — 1 i — i 1— fCi — • 1— co ] i- 4-^ r~~ 1 — 1 CD T~ CTr- r— Q Q 02: I/O fl^ H~ , "z. -z. s_ CO ^j- co — t 1 i co CO i. o i— r— o CO 2: J r— •— o •— O i — COQ s: c CJ r— r— o 2: CD r— r— CJ i— O i — -Z.-Z. ^~ i— • LU • • LU 1 . 1 i — i • . LU * J ' * • LUO . , ^f ,-j- o: co oo *3" <=}- Q; «3- QL •id-coo ^3- >^- rs 1 — LU LU r— CM LU LU i— LU i— LUCM LU LU CO • OL ct: • o; OL . OL • OL CsL ro_^ V«^ &~— * • •-; CD CD •-; CD CD r- CD r- SCDi— CD CD l — i »— H 1—4 1— 1 • 1 i— i i — i Lu U_ ^ LL_ Lu ^f H "* ' Lu LU c- r* 1 1 ! ~™™* cc co !i *. •z. B Lu Lu 1 1 o LU U- R Q Q 1 — 1 CM OJ OJ .— | CM C- 5: oz. "~ *~ j± r h- — } ™~i ~ § CTi CO •— ' — — * . I LO O i •H^- ^— R CO CO § •z. ! !; CM CM 1 LU s: t—( . -' u_ DC Q j I— 1 i co H- i •z OL * 1— H OL 1 t— 1 UJ «SI Q uj i ; X l~~a t— < 0 I ' 1 OL LU O^^ Lu ct LU l CD CD i — i Q o 1 I "^ 1 1 Q Cu ^« LU 1 O OL i — i i— i I-H ^—^, CO Q 1 1— I O I— —;r •— i p^^ OL ^^ 1— 0 C£ o LU I— h- i ~^ i— 1— 1 cC LUf ^C o: i— i 1 0 i — t h— 1 n> 1 DC ty s: ^g LU l— N^^X ry •z. •g^ 0 LU Q t— i LU DC Q • — ^ 1 fy n_ LU ^y o Q 1 Q • LU CO 0 1 gy o CJ cC o 1 1 DC Q LU D^ i LU I i— i t«? c^ 0 O ^y O DC d^ 1— LU re I t— O CO LU 0 ID CJ O OL O h- 0 I •z. >• »' y^* C£ ^ LU O H- to ! g • * LU "T~ o i CD fv* LU LU <£ a ^~ , s: 1— 0 1 — 1 re c^ OL OL s: •z. UJ O_ O l— f— CO -Zr- i — i D- OL H- 1— 4 —1 i— i el^ CD ^~ O ^" LU •SL s: o ID 1 — t 3 •^ CtC i — i i — i O . O O- CJ 0 f >- cr Q_ oo CJ CJ co I — _J D_ O Q- D- I CD CO LU DATE THE. SINGER COMPANY PAGE 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. REP. NO.

1- 1 o I-H CD " O

_J "^ , CD • r- Lu. O h- r- CD CQ! ^?T CD £ 51 1 i Q: jo , co f| 00 - CCCX CO s | ^^ j (V Q_ co C-' 0 LU Q CO CD CO LU LU LU LU UJ O 1— D- ^i ' eC LU O «J _J / A I _J ', } •: o: •~* 1 — 00 ID CQ coi LU o: _l CC CO CQ CQ CQ CQ o CO •a: 3: LU- eC LU ^^ •a: o ^^ ^^ c^ C£ 1 _j LU •z. -3. 1 _J V 1 _J L 1 l— O_ LU Qi l—l I-H LU C£ cC. O I-H »—i i—t I-H C3^ f_ UU Q. ^£ e3^ •z. <^ «=c ^0- ^£ e^ i^^ LU —3 "^ >- LU • >*' ^>, ^> ^> ^> ^> 2: D- O ^> o; a e^ ea; _J h- H- <^ •=c 1 0. LU O s: Q- ^ 1— 1 CD -z. ^ l— i 1 <£ 0 CD o =a: •. •* a; e^ eC «=c •a; ccc *~^ CD O O CQ D- | — •— 3: "^ h~~ 1— 1— I— h- CD" 2: CM e^ CO i^£ ^C ^ C£ CO =3; ^£ LU 1— _l Q Q 1 Q JLU- Q^^ Q ^Q^ Q Q ^~ 21 O 1 >- 21 ^X ^?^ ^£ Q CQ ^ Q_ >*?. CQ O O CQ LU ! LU \. O O O O CD ^* ~^yr_ DC •—l CO CO CO i— i H- 1 fy* O O ^Z. ^",

r— C$ — K- T CQ r— 1

LU O | CQ LU >- p! -o. a; i— S-+-> |^ CO

5 fV O : . : 1— 1 r-1 li |~ O" 1 i CvJ C- {^. CO r— , CO ! r—~ ; 1 — c^. ^. I— l et 2! O^ 1— r| ID ' i LU T-iiu L-r_r-|--- 2! """"" ' Z3 OL 1 co co UJ i— i • CJ O i— i i o: § t rV CD LU •z. CtL LU o: X L^U o LU Q l— LU H- •\^s 1 1 1—1 e^ ( ^ a: _J 2: J— ^d~ Ll_ LU LU I— LU Q. 1—4 r-H 5 ^o ct: _J I-H H- Q i—i Lu. PO LU •z. »-H ry ^- Q ^^ LU ct: LU 2! O ^^ Q- LU 1 D_ l ^i CD ID a: (V^ f— O >_ LU 21 LU LU o ra ^^ D- h- CtL cC CD ££ o O Q. 1— f— _l •z. QZ. Q"". ^— I— 1— o D_ i— i Q CD 0 CD CD CD i- i— i I-H CD . CO 2: ^^ , CD CD t — i LU LU LU ^_! O 1 § CJ 1 — 1 ^^ b? \— UJ a r- CQ ct: ct: 1 i ; cil o y»" LU LU CD" | — Q. LU CT5 Q. h- i—< Q LU g * i— i CO Q a: Ll- , E^ CD" CD KH 2: g I 0 Q Lu. Cu, co LU ^ i 1 DATE 10/20/72 ' THE SINGER. COMPANY PAG£N0.1~12 pi MIII AT n\- PRODUCTS DIVIS ON

REV. . ' eif-TH^Tcr;. NT* YORK REP. NO.

a

!

oo LU i i o - LU f LU j —U- . M f I_LI 1J 1 1 o: $_ 1 1 1 i Lu L.I.1 1I 1 LLIIJI i_j i 00 _J co i LX CQ CO co 1 ^£ ^t ^c ^C 3e3]| O i*^- _ I c£ t~- •«J »J _J -4 * '. O i — I— i 1 — 1 i— i ^5 < •=C ••=^ •=c 1 — »- * 3 cC «=^^c , ^^ LU I 9R 1C CT-r- co J- LU (T3 "O 0 0- C e^ (O CL. D: CO 00 S- ^T~ f1 ' ^- -£^j . o3 P~

co

1 t i 1 O (__i_, 'j (_/"j )• 1 — 1 i C3 U-JZJ CM CM •vf VO CVJ - t— •z. UJ ...-.•_.-«=» ZD ,_ LU r 1 — CO 2 O oc. — t i — i H- 1 — 1 LU I— h— i 1 _l i— i O Q § f_L U-LLl JI § 0 _J t— O o fV t— t 0 O^ i— i UJ CO i— i 1 i i r^ ^ | — ^" p>- s: Q s: CO ---^ 0 <^ UJ o cr D- D- Q- Q CJ DAT&/2n/7? THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. i .1 -5 ' ''^ SIMULATION ppnnnr-rs PIVI^IAN

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK . REP. NO.

1 •

1 i i oo 1 1 1 1 1 UJ oo i o t o ui f^ CQ CQ CO 1 ^^ o <£. CQ CQ LU e£ 7 (_3 "^> CO o CJ OO l — i ^> ^> D- | 0 1 1 g^ i =t o . ct et i— i UJ 1— I LU Q LU ct D_ ^^ e^" ^ZID LU ^f 1 ct ^t ^^ ^^ i— O- X o X H-4 X t— 1— D_ LU 1— I— 1— 1 LU »— 1 oo 1 — 1 U- 1— 1 =c i ct OO 1 cC UJ B i— i l — i l — i H-< i — i i— i ^1 1 1 1— 1 r— 1 H-H y^ 4JCft ^4 > > ^> > ^> >• ^» >- ct Cj^ cC «^I -. ^ £«, ,

1 1 1 oo

CM CM CM CM CM •- CM •- CO •- 1^| :i ^ 5 !

" *

I i

i Q o LU UJ ,r—^ Q^ C o3 UJ Q CO LU LU s 0 D- nD H- 1 H— ^y~ a; OO i— X UJ o ID I \-pI—. t — i ,^ i— i oo — 1 3XH • \\ i— O H- oo —i 1 * ' ™j c3: 0 ro I— D; I— H' LU LU 8 ^_ ^~ o ^£ ^£ »^_-^ LU oo t^) IO X 1 --*- -1 cx. 1 i—i s: 00 0 Q_ O- U. o I *~~* l— o *^^ 1 — C **^^ LU D_ p- D; 1 — 1 oo 0 OO CO oo ^ LU ct g oo ct CO i DATE in/OrW79 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. , , , 1U / ZU / / f. S|Mii|AT ON PRODUCTS PIVIS ON i J-t

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEWYORK REP .NO.

.•

-

oo 1 LU ! " 1 <-> ' S LU ! i

LU , U_ :i | LU in i CC •¥ B1 E- • CO (O 1 1 i1 B ! i[ill LU UJ CO E LU LU UJ UJ OJ — 1 — 1 — 1 — 1 l§: _J _J —i § D- > ^ ^B S* ? ff — LU ^* • §| 3; I <: Q_ ffi i [ | •=C "^C ^ «3£ ^c fi ^c ^£ f_. f^«^ •— \ (— t- i i— J— o- ^i S ^^ Q Q § Q o i— LU Q ° Fi r— Q O CD O O ! o 1 o 0 "2Z. 2: "Zi 2: ?< u 2- * LU | . P 1 — 1 — 1— ? 1 ? ? 5 d; £ P 5 •=c io P Q•* Q o 0 Q Q Q Q | O O o o O O 0 !

C£ GO "1 UJ l_- CO U_)_i SOs: CM i— S CM CM CM i =« | i | -^ S, Is 11

I

f— i—i J- 2T i o LU 03 C£ —l LU LU Q f^f* =5 CSJ cr LU LU _J LU OO C£ 1 1 1 — o ^i OO CD CD et ^~ l— l LU *^»^ 2^— :^ " "^X Lu. 1 1 1 C^ * * h- O"" • CM «^ CO CD Q_ 1— t— -4 LU O- 1 |— \— D_ Q LU . OO LU Q CO CO co Q i— i Cr D- Q. X co 21 o: CO LlJ i i t 1 1 1 1— -1 Q S DAT£n/7n/77 ' THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. , , , iu/^u//^ c; |M(il &7 in.M PRnpiin^ ni VI SI ON l"*l-> !

REV. - BIN.»i'.T»i. f,'<:# YORK REP. NO. i 1

*

oo LU o 2: LU i LU s 1 to LU 1 oo i .LU LU LU LU LU 1 LU i LU LU LU LU ' Ld LU oo 1 -^J t _J _J )F —if —l i _J _J i _l i o CX CQ CO CQ CQ CQ | CQ | CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ a: et ct et ef •=c CJ _l 1 — 1 _J J > — 1 — 1 — 1 _J _J 1 1— • M HH 1— —t f-H ~" 1 ~~ I ~" 1 1 (— H 1 I— et 31 Si < et -y i •*^- > . LU St et 5| et | et § et 5: • H « ^^ 1 D_ •=^C eC et J CJ CJ CJ CJ 0 0 c_> c_? CJ O CJ CJ| CJ CJ CJ CJ 0 CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ (•y 1—1 «^* l_H c^ D_ 1— 1 <^ t— C ^^ HI et 1 — 1 ^t i— i et g i—i et i — ' et i— i 1— ZD 1— 8 ZD t- ZD h- ZD h- ZD I— gT[ s: s: s: s: s: 1 sr. 1: "~ &Q £r si o s: a 2: Q ^! r7) s: Q s: a SO SI 0 ^T" /^ S 0 s: o p 2: o 2: o 2: o 2: o 2: o ^ CD 2 o z: O z: CD 2! 02: >:i CJ et 0 et CJ et 0 et 8ef CJ et 0 et CJ < CJet oo o CD O O 0 CD O CD CD o O O

"^ ^ "* "* "* "* 1 "* "* ^ ' c- ^ CD ia ^f CO U_ CM CM CM CM CM CM CM CM CO CM | CO | r— i — i sroipi => Z3 CJ i | et . H -^_ a«aca 1— \ ' 5 f~^ O 2: 2: et et CQ * 1 py^ o OO 1 1 — 1 ct: o: h- LU LU et l— CJ ct: 2: C£ i — i o ceL a: LU LU i— i 2: l— O£ O^ LU a: 0 0 0 rv ct: ^~ ^~t ^£ LU LU f~\ LU oo 2: LU LU oo ^^- i s: CD ^> Q Q OO CD O H- 2: s: O 1 — l ^?r O o; 2: LU O D_ O LU et CD fV LU O D_ LU O CJ ct: 00 CJ s: ct: CJ ct: CJ D- CO Q Q- O h- 2: LU f- LU OO OO •^ o OO ct: 2: | — « 1 U_ c^ C3 O t— __i _J CQ CD Q 8 e=CJ s: • > n~ h— 1 CD 1— CD CD oo ^3 3 C o e^ l — i >- CD" oo > OO oo OO cC § | — CJ ct: | S OO UJ 8 i DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO.1-1 6 | 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION i r R V . • BING"A-'-'~"f.' . NC*' YO"K REP. NO. ' 1 !

.

CJ eC 21 Q O ! oo C£ ^r- \ i LU LU \ ? j LU o; LU ^. ; s: \ o 1—4 Lu LU \ . , * ^-^ U. (S> t _J OO . LU ., CX ,C£. — 1, .0?.! ,cx " > > r=> 1 •=c .51 el c3 el ca; | oo ; - - - 0. Q_ ^. 2: 1—4 1 — I C£L 1 — 4 i— i ct ca: «a; ca; 1 1 cx • J™ ZD et 1 (— I— 1 :\ j o- X — 1 ZD x \ S ! X LU g; Q g i 1 — 4 Q 1 — 1 Q g _J o: _l i i — i 1 T Q LU o 2: CX CX LU CD O o CD r— DC ZC zc zc g; oo 2C 2: 2: i 1 1 1 O °i i • 11 ' _J CO | CQ 1 < 2: 1 1 i 1— 0 ] LU 1 ••J O. QJ 1 | ZZ) i- 4- ' oo oo OO OO oo oo i t oo OO oo OO oo 00 i zc O^i — 2; 2: i 2: 1 2: 2: 2: 2: 2: 2C ! oo fO| — •O CD O CD O CD O CD: O CD i O CD O CD O CD CD CD O CD O CD ! CD CD .._.. ^y S- ! i ^^ i— i 2: ' — ' 21 1—1 2: 1-4 2t i—i 2: 1—1 2: 1 — 1 2?"" l-H 2: i— i 2: 1-1 2: i LU ro ~tZ- i | i H- I—" p-~ HH J— f-H 1— ._, J~~* l-H I— l-r { CJ CX C cf_ •**/ ca; N^ c-C ^-^ ;~ X; s: 2: s: s: ^>2 s: s: s: ^>^ ^ 03 E s: o 2: Q 2! Q SQ s: o s: Q s: o 2: Q 3»~ cZl Z3 CD 2; O 2T O 2t O 2C o 2: o 2: CD 2: CD 2: §i! CJ cC cj ca: §1 O eC 8§ CJ < o ca: o ca; 8 ca! CJ cX ; oo ; i CD o O CD o O o o o o <~"j ; i— ° • •vf sr s£ »*• i •*" ^ ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ - 1 i CD cSo 1 1 2r^ 1 2; «d" kO r— CO "" i — CM i— : "* 1 s5°Z: D 1 ^0 ! ' - ' „ . , ! 1— | CD. el C£. fy* • ^y O o o 1— l— 1 — 1 O OL 0 1— LU O LU ti o LU CJ LU x-^ 1 4 00 LU OO o^B^ ca^ c^ ej; cf LU ca; CQ ZD e^ 2: ^ 2T 2T 2: 2T OO 2: s: s: - — *>" •Z^L "^r ^** LU 2T 2: 2: •LU LU LU o LU LU LU <: <£. =t ct i g 03 21 2^ 2!! 2T 1 — . 1 — 1 — 1 — § 1 — 2: 2: 2T 2: 2T LU cj^ ca: i— (^ e^ ^* LU LU LU LU s: j., Ll_ . 1— 1— =t 0 „ LU Q <=> Q ZC 2: ' 2= CD. Q 2C y 2C 2T 2T i ej; 05; ej; UJ CX •^ ca: ' ^s. 1— »— 4 CO CQ CO Lu Lu Lu LU CQ CO Lu CQ 00 ZD 1 1 1 ZC ~r~ ZC "T" 1 i ZC 1 j 1 ^ CD" oo -J ZD > > > _J — i 1 . °° i CJ oo LU I i DATE 10/20/72 ™E SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. -,.-17 w/ w «;i MI n AT ION PRnnurr*; DIVISION ! i REV. • BiNG»-v.rcN. ?.'•:*•• YORK .RE?. NO. .

\ : \ |

. I i co I UJ j z. | UJ [ UJ U- to t ^*J ft" t &- . ff i " • if 1 CO c co ^ UJ UJ UJ LU i o c: _j _l _1 r i ct: CD CO CQ CO O et et _J _J t— t—i 1— 1 t— i I — i et et UJ *^-^ ^> ^* I ct et $ CU 1 — 1 et ct et i |__ 1 1 O1 » ^U. m 1 ^ Z ^ * K .i dCO S| I y 1 1 1 1— o UJ i 1— f|

ID S--M oo CO CO co 1C ' C>r- CO fOl— O CD -O CD O CD O CD

i— i >*^, >~H ^^ J 1 i _, . . *— • 1 ^ ^' UJ rO~G 1— ^ |— 1-1 (^ > O- C ct ^ ct N^ et "^-^ et ^ et TO O O O <_) CJ) CJ CJ CJ i Q. Cr: i— < ^t 1 — I Ct t-n et 9 p?^ CV* ^- fY" 1 CO co s- "—*• (^ s: c ^ 1— - i-^1" P t— ^D 1— oCS E 2: o 5~ Q S Q S 0 0 Z. o 2: o z: O Z. ^> 2: O et C_) Ct CJ et 0 et CO k O o o O

"^ "^ "* ^ • 1

1, j. c^ co 1! LU SL: j CD co u-t; Z. •— ^- CO •3- I s g ~p,! f ! et *

1— Q

i O i — i 1— i " ^~ CJ> ^> o: co 1—I LU ^f>^^ •^y UJ ^— I— 2: UJ et '• CJ ( I • • LU ^* a: LU LU i s: y^ ct t— ct: ct: i UJ O- O ID h- t— 4 1— 1 CO CJ CO ^ j ^» u_ I LU cr H- Q 1 — 1 CO CO UJ 1 DATE , THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NQ in /*>f» /•?*> TMtiC. n\J. i i Q L\}f4.(jffl c;| MI || AJ JON ppnpifrTS r>IVIS'l<~>w l~lo

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NQ.

1 .

11 1 • '

. i\ K1 *

\ 1 I oo |1 K! UJ o 1 & UJ Q I I c£ UJ "Z^. 1 Fi "u_ u_ 1 UJ vt 1 — 1 ^_ g C£ Q J- O o oo

^ 1 i . _., »• CQ X ,, LU .1' O 1 ' | ^3- DQ O OO • h- UJ rD _c- s: a. u_» CL 0, LU o j— (Or— f~~ or ' ) ^_ 4_> to D- rc CT"r*" ^. oo . rct- CJ3 00 .03 UJ — ' 2: V—* o . Q- C 3: O 1C « i__j •=c CO j— _ r—, t— O- o: <=c oo oo oo i- UJ _1 |_|_| 2u fV* j_j^ I ex: rs PJ CQ D- CQ H- oO £~ Di 0 C£ 00 3 t-, a: 1-1 >- •=C OO 00 vo ^,

"* *

1. py .>. co 8 5 & S- S u •gr o5 «=}- o f\ I H 2- CM I 1 0 g ^ n t — 1 oo L- * 13 Q. O 1 i C£ § r i Q- " 1 O | 1 i— i or t— UJ UJ 2 i rv i CD CQ \ o: t— t x,x • •-y*^Lr i' \— ^U_ 2^ O « h * * |"^-' CQ ! | ^» ,E; C£ UJ t D_ i \— U_ oo 5 cr >^ ' DATE in/90/79 THE SINGER COMPANY • PAGE NO. , ,Q J.U / £V 1 1 £. ' <; iv.ill AT IDN PRO^lfT^ DIVISION L" Ly !

REV. ' - BiN-7.HV.rr ON. NCW YORK 'REP . NO .

' 1 L i

* CO i I Q O i CO LU C_ 5 i Q C£3 LU •ZL 00 O rv' LU t^ i LU ^> CO i CO CO •=^ f i LU CM CO 0 CQ co i i 1 1 1 CO i T

rn es I- Q O ?" § CO flj I — •— ' 1 — rv^ i i- _J O CO LU fO ~O ^>" ^>~ o 2: l i O Q_ C CCT r? OO t— ' CO CO S- ^*- (V NX C£. 1 1 l y^ d* i — i i — i 0 0 0 h- JD

•vf ^ ^ _"* i •-—>,»«_— ci co "~~"""""~ i UJ l_v CO U-i— i 21 CE: CM CM CM CM i L 1 co i

o1 __ _, o s: t i— LU O o

Q ! i — i

O co l_ •z. >y o: i' (V C£ . * UJ O o o O ^_- 1 UJ CX. O o o^— fe I it CO — j "^ i cr g CO LU i I 1

DATE ln/9n/79 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGENO.i^on LU / L\) 1 1 £. qiMiiLATinM pRnniirT<; nivi^ ON

REV. . B!V>V.<70M. NT*. YORK REP. NO. 1 •J

& !

CO 1 1 1 o & UJ ct: 1 & UJ K g U_ to ft g UJ B n a; V- I | CO i co 1 I 1 i § c: 1 i o I I I1— UJ S SI 1 • O- J 1— 1 1 ZD O' UJ r— Q 1 I C£ | o „«*. UJ CD _i i CD 2: 1a ^i e£ O f— i UJ .c i ! H- c. a. i I— -(Or- ! ZD CO TO]^ S- LU UJ UJ (O "O cc: a: oo CO 00 ; 0 a. c •— i ZD CJ> O ! >~( ^£

CO CO CO CO 00

i i

c; iy !, | V UJ 1- § 5: o 2 T~ •—

? _, i:

Q UJ h— < H- co N^ Q ZD CO 0 i i— i O' I-H ^^ i— i ^C ZD co •— • ^*- 1— (~Y —J CO o 1 — I CD 0 t— t | _J 1 ^y_ [^ ^ J— l— ~Z. 1— =C LU X «3I LU U, UJ I— ^y ^^ UJ >- 2n i — i CO H- •^ CD CXL - CX. Q 1— i — « O ^T~ CO £^ ^ ^- o: ! CO ZD 3 >~ o- co UJ i w DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 1-21 10/20/72 SIMULAT ON PRODUCTS DIVISION

,REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. - i i i l B

9

* 1

1 1

i i ir in i i y 1 a " 11 i 03 A w E1 *. s a, : UJ LU LU LU — J __J .— J oo CO CO CD CQ |_! ml 1 LU ^=C ^5, 1— ; c ^> ^> & LU t •^X ^£ cT ^^ i I U- : i LU e:t •=c ^t e;-- • •=c ^^ i c£ h H- 1— I— > -• cr <£. (^ fee! i 00 cz> Q . Q Q *v^ ' O! ' oo — ^ • 1 o CD O CD CD fc Ij y* ^1 CDS i! CtL •£ •z. ;y •z: W] 2=1 V- jt ^ ; • J! I .\" •i o jno-J •«• r l— •sT" 1 te^— I UJ LU LU LU LU LU I Pi _ i 1 __, 1 •r— CU 1 <-< _!_ oo OO OO OO oo \ i — ^3 I - O. C-' oo oo OO oo oo <— ' 1 c fCc — i 0 U. J. LU' ^y ^y . S-4-> ^*- ^*" ^y ^£ S ft — 1 CD o CD O O CQ Q rcT£ I — 1 1 — 1 i — i 1 — t 1 — 1 ^| | "-C (V s- oo oo OO oo oo (_j JJ u (OX; _l _J _J t— «=c — ~i •^ ^t 0 2 o Q- C ZD ZD ZD it n CO (O Q_ D_ Q- D- D_ LU O 1 C£ o CD o O O 2: 8 i ^^_ 00 i- o; fy a: >—i i o s: o; Q- D- O- D- Q. CD LU o3 E •z. •^_ 2: •2^ •z_ LU 1 1 — 1 i — t 1— H i — i f— >-z. ^> CO CO co ro CO CO ( . , f oo • • 1 * =fr <=*- UJ "* ^ ** ** | 0 _ s ex. °~1 oo L^U | r

<•O CO co ro CO vo yi. SI LU ! 1— OO | > OO

O i — i "- 1 OO LU ' ZD Q- o: o u_ LU o; ^o: •z. o. LU fy* ^ u a: cc: zz> » j— O ( 2: •z. LU LU CQ i— i 1— 1 , i •^r LU i fV* g^ •c; t i CC LU Z3 I UJ CD ZD D_ | — s: ( •z. a: CQ l— i O [ \~~ \ — 1 . | LU cc: CD I 21 C3 fV LU 2; • LU 2: * •z. o . Q. hvl UJ LU 1 t• *— * i «£_ LU 0 "- h 1 Q •z. i — i R t — — OO ^—i oo LU 1 — ( 1 — I OO CJ3 D. ZD X cr s: :5 U. o s: LU oo UJ 1 k a --.--_-. * c DATE. /9ft/79 - THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO., o<> 1U / \m 1 i £. <; IMIII AT ON PRODUCT?; DIVISION \."i£.

REV. BINGHAMTCN. NEW YORK • REP. NO.

r ) i-

1 i CO C£ 1 * 1 LU Q 2: : i— i i i ! . o ! 2: ti 0 , —I i '• 1 o 1 iL 1— 1 CO Jx- 1 1 i- CM \ i fO * 0 i h- LU >— LU S i Z. I— 00 h- S 1 UJ OO CO co i— Si co CO CO . 1 : , - • — 5 o. cu •^ GX fC r — o o ; C3 LU UJ '*-•»-> a: I-H I a: — 1 CT-r- h- h- |— CQ Q roh- "^t fV i- o |-xj O f— <=c fO "O o 1— 1 C_5 O Q. C C£. CQ 03 z: •z. i 1 o: o OO o •^ 00 i- i— i OO 1— 1 O ^^ (LJ h- LU h- f^ i0 .jO 0 C_3 UJ oQ E a. •=c 1f. 1 ^3 LU LU ^> f^ a: u H- oo 1 ^ CO "^ "^ j ^ UJ I ^i.jn-.^.j,...^.^ ., C_5 ^y^ ^ * r FrTlf[JTi=TIr D- cc: : OO LU to cou_t— ' O «=!- 00 s: ^ § ' UJ H- 00 UJ CO DC I UJ i O O_ LU CJL oo ; ^^ ! \— D; I— I \ | 0 ^* t^-J • : O h- o e^ 0 o 1— 1 CY* s: H- Q z: •=C >- o i fv] 31 o i— t )% i— a: D: h- ' I— ££ co •=1^c ] UJ 0 co $ &- o UJ —J 00 HJ cc 1 i 1 >X r~j "Z. a. a. ^ i , . UJ o v^- o ^ <^L 1 r) cc ijJ Q. i— i 1— i— t o 0 _4 00 2: LU UJ UJ 0 13 o- S. Lu f 00 LU i i S . s DATE 10/90/7? THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. ]__23 lU/ZU/// t?(M|i|AT HN PRnpuCTS PIVIS ON

REV. . BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. 1 1 1 i ' i i | | * | LU | LU M] «• x « d i— i i i 1 t—l i X S | 1 " 1 O /"V Fj ii ^ o: Q | t- 1 I i , i 1 i— ' ' § | . i 1 1 i LU \~~ v! H CD UJ a t! : CD 21 f \ C£ o J i : °? • 4 i I—. ^g^ ti K ^« \ 1— 1 o 3 9 fO ^J 2: u( 31 & Hi i E « O! • 1 1 ij |j 1 C£ ! 1 ' i GO >< LU X i i o 2: ^ 1 I K LU D^i GO GO CQ CQ eC 0 jfl 4] LU GO i — i LL. CQ GO 1 LU , o: 1 O O Q_ i 0 o i O CM CM O . i GO 0 «s 0 GO CD o CM CM CM o: LO CO ! 1 | f- j I LU ^~ CD CD CD CD Q_ 'Zi "Z. 'Z. i i H-H i t k^— 1 i i c. o; o: Qi T CD' (Or— LU LU LU LU UJ i-4-> '' > > > __ r— __J Q mh^ LU LU LU LU i Q£ <*. "ZZ. ~ZZ ^ ^ § § 0- C s: § S 2: (tJ 1L± CQ I oc L J _1 r x ) _J 2: GO S- •=c 2: «c 2: - C£ >- rs.y O GO O GO O GO CD GO 1— co 11 1 n: LO LO LO LO \ co ^.j! ^.j! ^! ^! LU CO o 2: < o Q- (>^ co LU GO i LU 51OH-I CM CM CM CM i GO 2: r> iM GO CD i

LU i t LU ! _J

1— CC \ Ii — t CQ UJ i o: Ivj \^ CD 1 — 1 ^~ iI Q i e^ i ! — i — i LU \— ^! X ; ~~i •i- UJ LU 0 U_ 2! . ID • LlJ Q_ i — i ^j. i — i 1— 1—4 CD •^^r 1 GO ID <£ c^C LU c^y 1 ^^ LU 1 — ~r oo UJ

_LJJ.- -.- .„ * __ Q ____- ».-,.-._-.-_,-_ -^----n-.-n-rr-..-^,^ 6 f.

3MSP Nt'cEKENCE JOCUf-iE^T LISTING rAo - 1-24 7 StU s (~ DOC . l") Q f DATE SR.CE NUr-JER i. fciV DOCUMENT TITLE KECD LOoN NO. 9 10 SORTED a Y r; 'J D E X NUMBER 12

1 SHUTTLE MISSION SIMULATOR STUliY

OCTOrCR 20, 19/2

z73 KSC-03824 SS -HAS£ B EXTr^SlUN FINAL RE = aRT-pA YLOAI! i Mr ACT v2A 15JE72 Ho 002 NA FM347234 ?i.N Ai^nRlCAfJ AoPROACri 10 SnUlTLE CRc« bt'L/ !'«'«(>/ ASS 1GK Ho OOo z • h! A 1 -SM A 7^ (•loC-0'l2i7 C a^Ar- SHUTTLt r..N + C DESiGN Eii'uATIUN UoCuMSNT 15JE72 Ho D GH MSC-03024 SS ^riA^^ d EXTENSION FiNAL .-?!;i ORr-MAbS PriCpQ^TlES V3 Ho 005 GP M5C-U3324 gi; r-HA5£ y EXTr^SlOM FINAL Sc = OR T-EXtiCuT 1 Vt. JUMMARYvl 15JEX2 OUo f,r W..7, l£U'J,-)IOAL REPOo'l SYSTEM + OSblVEK PART 2 VUL 1 15JEX2 Ho 007 r Mr T-C'-'NiCAL SEPOn'f SYSTE'H + oOUS TF.K PAK I 2 VOL 2 15JL72 Ho 006 Mr FINAL I^ASS PRO.-^ERT ic.3 REPORT PAST 4 15JE72 Ho 00-J Mr- 1 Si M p 7 ^ M D C — *• Q ^ b £ u r V F L 0 P M E N T fc C.' r u I R E M C.f t i S P A R 1 3 15JE72 Ho 0 1 0 M u C — ti 0 b 0 o |f-;C|:,jICAL SEPOnT-MMC ACTIVITY PA<! A SPA'-i SHUTTLE rAT* LlSI 1SJE72 Ho 034 - NR NAS91096& T£C'Ji4iCAL REPOol PHAb'E S VOL 1 15JE72 Hu NF 1 ? M V 7 i NA3510960 l'.-C^,gICAL REPORT prtASE B VOL 7 1DJE72 III IMP J -S J r 7 i N A S 5 1 0 5 u 0 TfC^^iCAL SUMfs^Y O^SiTER DEFINITION VuLuM^ '*• PA^Ti 15JE72 Ho 2 iii _J K 7 i _i\ A s ^ i o y 0 G T.-Ct-\ICAL SUMC.A^Y QRdirER DEFINITION VoLuMn 2 PART2 15JE72 Ho 03o 2 GP N A S i 1 1 1 b Q S^Ari SHUTTLE i Ow CoST/SISK AVIONICS S'fuLiY 1 5 J E 7 2 Ho 1 i *s ri r 7 1 iHUTi'LE SY^TEMc EVALJATION OpbifER DATA VOLUME 3 16JE/2 Ho 04U 0 041 NB 0 n M N 7 ^ NASS1096Q 3PAi~c SHUTTLE ^HASE b FINAL AVIONICS KEPOtU 15JE72 Ho 9 2) A F 7 i NASc26 1 o? t^GT^t DESIGN ntFINIfluN REPORT A V I ONI CS-P.-iAoE CD 3GJE72 Ho 042 8 KC S [Hi x^T IGM PvLSn^-TS Rc.PO.Sl Ho 7 fiiS^iAYS + ruNT^OLS rUNCTIONAi RCQLJ 1 Kti'lENT S opEC. 2SJE72 Ho 044 6 5 a ... - - 3 l SMsq RE-c^Cc uGCuMErtT LISTING rA jt 1-25 !c 7 .DOC. . nor. UATE SLU 8 ( KcCU NU. SSCE l'l A. T r NUI-uc-a Kb v DOCUMENT TITLE LO-N 10 11 ' 0 O A P 7 4 MSC INlldX f.SC 1 NFQRf, AT IGM Rc'fRiEV Ai_ SYSTEM 27JE72 H . ornczi- cRu'i I'NTERFACF uef INI TION STUDY. PHASE j. 26JE72 U40 12 QilAFf.0 FAC'LlTY EEFINi'i'juN STuDY hOK U^iV r'LIsinf 6 1 '''oLX'Tr.NR LV'Al... OF SYNCXAsYMu EXECUTIVE SYSTEM. ri)K sPACc. ShUjTLL UbJL72 _ Ha Q46 ..Ml OnjE7^ - -- - ';- - - 2 0 I « A 7 1 MSC !o2542 TYP. SHUTTLE MU3IUN PROFILES + A i'T . T i »EL 1 NE3 V4 1UL72 " H UbO ..NA 27.AG71 . If-p-'tS. REFNTRv MISSION PROF. FCrt DELTA wlNG CR3ITER UJL72 h g MA 3 IJA7^ cCU'-iOMIC ANALYSIS SHUT ILL SYSTEM VOL 2 1UL72 H UDl 11JL72 -L.C.. .l-=>i-."»7i M3e26°b2 ur 1SMV71 ALTERNATE CONCrPT + UEf 1 IN IT lOM-rA v I ON I Cb PAKT 4 1UL72 H UDO UD4 i ; WA KI«?T VERTICAL FLIGH'f TEST ,XiSS!UN_ 14JL72 Ho T Ha 653 NA 1 ft J F. 7 ^ MSC-0705Q 0 = T MUf-1 SRM TH^UiT p«0r I LL-i-li M [ MUM ULUU 1 4 J L X 2 14JLX2 Ho UOO . N A .. 3 n K A 7 ^ MSC-070D7 R;j3T bLACK OUT bNC ANALYSIS OF OR&ITER SPACE SHUTTLE MT USSTUN DATA BOn^-P^ObRAj', AND SYSlEM HASELlNE PARfg Vi 14JL72 Ho Ob'X jaL_ MI)C-c055a USSTiJN IjATA bO'^^-U^J£7i. M I) C — t, 0 ^ 0 £•> z TfCri. SUMMARv nUOSi'ER PT ll-o App U7JL72 a UXa c Jl 7o M5>C*-G07u6 3 P . - V A . C X D C R r w TNG PLAN R u = F I IN . OXJLX2 u oxx IMP MSC-U3307 SHUTTLE 3 FXtC* SUMMARY vOi . 1 UXJLX2 07o jj«0"-iA-l MGT.PL>N FOR PnASE CXQ 07Jt.X2 a 07 J NS txi^RNAL n? TA...^ STUDY SUMMARY .VUL1 07JL72 o Obij NA 17HC70 S.-iUTTLf. EiNG . S I -.;Ui_AT I UN SURVEY U7JL72 o 061 -i a .SS. QoJL7i.. ALl^KNATE CO^CePTS-EXtt; SUi", PART 1_ 07JLX2 ALl.CNCPTS.TtCu.aUri.ShUT.flEF. P2V1 U7JL72 G G» GnJI.71 c .66 Oftjl 71 M~C-°35iG 07JL72 U64 N A PHc.1.. I M. M I SS I Utv PRUFltE-lJtSC.+LANiJ U7JLX2 is Ooo > MSC-U4243 U7JL72 Ooo NA ? i A G 7 o 17616 h 0 i) 4 0 c\l"JY CoRRlDuRc FOR HI LXD (TRW) 07JL72 UoX ..NA... ..OnAF?^: . FLl(~-iT P£Rs,CG ,P,rSii-iULA f OR Rfb-lNF 07JL72 D Ob's NA 0 H J r 7 -i C.C'LASKY SI . .hFTf PRQJcCTt'ii CoNFlGUKATJoN ._. ^ ... JE72 uyj _ . . - - AVlr^lCs UEEK-V.AR PHASc. CXQ CoNrlG. l

5 f SMS.S REi-tR.EN.CE. ^.CIC_Uii£ilT LISTING fAoE- 1-26 7 ..DOC... HOC. UATE SE'J J 0 SRCE ilATF N o f ci E R F ;EV ouCUMcNT TITLE *£CU -OuN •Ml). 10 A P 0 0 M S 7 ^ T'>'JASTE CONTROL TASKS + ^YS VoL i Ho "101 a6 -.N_4_ MSC-04062 0*«Mt.R FLIGHT TECH •*• LANDlNa, PT SUBORcilf AB^'RT Ct\TRL 25JL72 Ho 102 CAN rrUuE INTEG VEHICULAR I INFOP^AT I ON MANAGiMti\iT SYS 23JL72 Ho NA 0.1FU71 : NA 2^JF7i rtSC-L"33Ub ICU FOR SPACE qiuiTLii SYSTEM 26JL72 Ho 104 MSC-0471I GKd^rEK FLIGHT TECHNIQUES foK FLYBACK ADOPTS 26JL72 IMA ?7J|. 71 Y |V 2SJL72 H- 106 NA \ I !-'• V 7 1 'SC"*o5i^o P* LOAD CG .ANA, YSIS . FU/< ^SHUTTL^'^ i.i>t-a'f-s i us; LOADING ...... ; 1 n J A 7 <> i~lSC*"UfJ^l2 PAY! UA.O CG Ai\'Ai YsIS r~0« SHUTTLE* CNj-TO-Eh|D L^AUiNG _.lHHC7a.. PILOTED SlMUL nlUi'Y — (JNr'OUERED CROSS W 1 ;\ ii LANJ»N&3 26JL72 'rio 100 NA Ci'UI 71 CHcTKUiJT SYS SnI'iMAKY Rc-POST/U^Jl V CONT RUL-D I S^t-A Y C0|-i3 2SJL72 Ho lu* NA GHDC71 ^ASsl2^2'* TIFP. SlMUL OF eSv LANDING APppQACH-MUN [ nLY K^PORT Ho 110 UrIV jF OPTIMUM oIMUL Or SPACE STATION COf.K. T'-ChNlpUE 2 a J L 7 2 1 11 ssv ENIRY sir-iUi AT i ON . ._ _ . 2SJL72 Ho 112 . NA - -- — NA 0.1 DC 71 NASSl09i>0 STU^y ANALYSIS DEPORT UF SSV MANUAL UQCKI N'U" ^ I MUL A 'TOR 2 6 J L X 2 Ho 113 114 _NA. .2«SP7i. AiKrKAFT FLICHT TEST IN3TK ANALYSIS FOR SSv 2^JL72 ' NA TIFS SlMUL OF cSv LANDING APPROACH-MONT HLY RC.PORT 28JL72 110 IN'TTG SPACE pR^iRAil + VEHICLE SYS ANAL YS I S-S 1 UC Y B 2(iJL72 Ho 116 NA NASU-2129 ------• - - -- NA o I'l A ;; 71 l-'4Tr^ OPERATIC.MS/PAYLOAD/FLEET ANALYSIS V'OL^ PAYLOAU" 2aJL72 "' Ho 117 1 MA o n A r, 71 NASu-2129 HTPj OPERATH^iS/PAYLOAiJ/FLEE-f ANALYSIS VCi_ z MISSION 26JL72 He Uo OHA.G71 N A3 L -2129 I'jTr,.; OPtfiAT10iiO/PA Yl-OAIj/FLEET ANALYSIS VOL o Ex£C S^ 23JL72 Ho 119 .__N.A. . lr oSV GOmiUN ICAT?UNb cOVcRAGE \/_pOLAR OfiblT 2nJLX2 Ho 124 NA MSCi: (572-5 PKGTt'CT SPACE ^riuTTLE-^S*' tN'f-':Y SIMULATION 26J'L72 Ho 126 w M F. D y A. F 7 1 Sv7l-l3-_. . SSV Crt£W STATIn" rtEVl£; NO. 2 28JL72 Ho 126 C NA KSC-0331Q aSV OPERATIONS PLAN , 0" PHASE C/U VOL. 2 OKBiTER Ho 12X + 0 n M A 7 i SSV PAYLOAD HA-jiiLlNG DOCKINr; 23JL72 H 1 '•* A F 7 1 A71-36409 0-(aTTAL CARGO T«ANSFtfi SYSlcil . 2SJLX2 Ho SSAri STATION aUlLOuP * IM.ULAT JON-F_INAL_ REPOR > 26JL72 Ho _NA 011JI 71 NA5S1 1946 ------3 IN A 10FR71 SSPL-27 SSV EVALUATION or FOUR SIDESI'ICK CO'VI KULLErtS O"N SlMUL 2HJL72 ho B ~ 1 SSV PEKFCRMANCr CAPAiilLIJIES- 01 AGX2 Ho + NF Onji 7^ J2SV 18329 DISPi_AY3 CONT^oLb i'lECHANl 'L AT I ON 3'JMrtARy 01AGX2 Ho c NA SSV PROPOSFP DnCunENI A'l JC-N I NPOft KAT I 0,S 01AG/2 H XJ4 13o onji ?<> SK CfT: P! A r; 7 ^ Hi'Ni' fiS-NASA/Sf NGcfi itEtTilMb w b' SwlNT HA IN ENGINE ICii 02AGX2 Ho 141 " ,2^JE7i M3C-0231'j SS'v OPERATIONS PLAN F0f< PHASE c/J VUL 3 dOoS'ER 03AGX2 h A AE C fl A G 7 i N A S A C R iNTr^KATED OPE^ATION/P YLOAD/FL£tT ANALYSIS "OL 4 03AG72 H _AJ_ -Q.SJA7.1- . AT 1 -.36 642.- P.VEI iM RESULTS MANNEU. CARGO XFER STUDY UND^ ZERO G ..H 144 3 4

i5 SMSS KEctRcNCt ^OCuMEMT LISTING rAu L 1-27 7 .DOC, I'OC DATE SEW n SRC- iJ A T F NOhbtR REV DOCUMENT TITLE RcCU LO<-N .NO. 9 !0 r NA 0 i'l J F 7 1 3PA E XPGl\TATIr> SYS TtCri VOL o INTEGRATES EuEC/PoWEK C3AG72 H 143 11 1 ilA_ CnjL7UAL IQAG/a H Ibb 14 Jl 7U S.SV .-xC-EMiftY NA,,. dARO ALflMEf^K AND VuK/U!*£ 10AG72 rt i. r5 M.! ir,FR7.i £\>iT Y + TERMilNjL NAV O^ING i^LS OR AiLS + VOR/DME 10AG/2 Ha lo7 1 M i. G 4 (i C 7 1 23A. 49-71 . uNT-'Y + LAMDIK .-- (jRSfTEK USING PRS NAVAlU 10AG72 Hu 156 KA 3UI 7<: a3 ^.-icilTciR GuC a/u FUNCi. RciJM.jTS VERTICAL F^-I^HT OpN 1 0 A G7 2 Ho n 160 ' _._ NA. - 2 7 J c 7 <: S3 A S d L I N E A C f 0 |-l 0 D A T I 0 N S FOR P A Y L 0 A i) a 1UAG72 Ho — NA 2 w N; v 7 i i,3V PROGRAM AVTUNlC3 SYSTEM KFCOi'lMENu A T 1 0*3 14AG72 lol NA 502-23-J2 .. oENTrfAL '^Ui TIP jUCtaaOR' + MAN-'t ACH I Nc TECnNi(j-ES 11AG72 ha M3C-06744 u£ST»M RtO. SPirC. VISUAL SIMULATION fOr< S^S "PRELIM. [ 11AG72 Ho 163 Mr . OOAS7* T NFL VE7L-Q6^9 CAB .\i STuDY )NO'12A (DRAWING) 13HG72 ' Ho 104 \ic DC71 VE7C — Q7U|5 UXd'fAL UISPLAvo * MAN FLT CONTROLS anuSYS C^-NF. U1AG72 loO .._. NP PROF U S A L S-'Ar^ SHUTTLE nROGRArt TECHNICAL PROPOSAL VOL-3 17AG72 hci Ibo NP PROPOSAL So "ROGKAfi AtRn DESIGN DATA aOQrt VOL. ^ ORblTEK 17AG72 167 — ..NF PROPOSAL 33 ^KOGRAK . AEKi DESIGN DATA anoK VOL. 2 MA TE" Vflrl ] CLC 17AG72 Hu loo Nr 33 "rtOoKAM THEp^OU YMAMiC DcSiQN ^ATA fcfOOK 17AG72 Ha

N[E_ S3 ^,-cCiJRAM FLl"HT CONTROL DATA BOOK 17AG72 170 S3 n«Ot,RA^ ExTrRfML TANK 17AG72 171 ._ HC HOC-60 1 DiGTfAL COMPuTt-rt w£.\ERAL DESCRIPTION ._ 23AG72 H HC HilC-oOl DIGTfAL CCMPuTi-K SOFTWARE SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION 23AG72 H 173 174 .... HC HDC-601 . PLA^cLl WIRE liE-.iORY jECniMiCAL UtSCrtlPflON 2 3 A G 7 2 H - - •• •- - ••- SK f- V7 1 SKC-200 j S J c ° 0 U T I iX £ LIBRARY REFERENCE MANUAL 22AG72 H S3Mr' ACTuATOR t^cftVO LOUP SPEC I F I CAT 1 UN'S-MSF C 22AG/2 H 1/0 N4 IEEE CONK JiGTfAL CONTROi L£R FOR HIGH P^ESauRE ROCi\ET c-NGli\F. 22AG72 h 177 .. .. NF 1 ? M A 7 <; PROPOSAL .. S3 "RuGRAf- TESt PROPOSAL 2 4 A G 7 2 n 176 Ho" i7y NA 2 7 S rft o i sCi- o i^T^KPRETI Vt SifiULATiON APOLLv O GUIDANCE COi'IPuTER 01SE72 . . NA. . 1 « A L 7 «i VISLAL ;•••, i N T HU"! VISUAL REQO i r Io7 &.I.. . .2 n J l. 7 1 AIAA SHUTLE OTILI2... I'lOiN FOR aORTi-S AND AuTO«A TE^ PAYt.OA.J- 14SE72 H OnJI 72 MSC-07009 A-::)U^r CAPABILITY AabtSaMcNT PARALLEL Srtll "SHU » TLE H loy ... NA ('.SC-05276 . ... 3HOT|-LE INCRtrt.-'NTAL VEKTiCAL FLIGHT TEST AdCtN'f STUDY USE72 H 1«0 NA 17Al.7i! HSC-O23a A "RFPRESENTAI iw- RCE.XTKY A'ND "LANJLNG FOR SHU'TLE 14SE72 H Ivl N A. 1 n ^i A 7 ^ A~:iO"'7 CONTROL rON5irjER«T IONS ' Bu_RiNG_p«oc/Eoh* LAUN-CH H n •- •------NA 1 o M A 7 ^ CfjM ARATIVE ANjt-YSiS-'srtufTLE ASCENT IRAJ GRAVITY TURN ~" 145E72 KA. LANDING CHAPACrC-RlSTlCS OF THF 04QA ORallEK 14SE72 H 1*4 S^i-S rJtt-c.»vti>(Ct uOoUKtfiNiT LlSTiNG r Aiit ' 1-28 .

DOC. HOC 1 SflCt n A r F Nlll-'aEH I.Ev UOCUHtiMT TMLt 3 1 C U L0- ^J N J .

n 0 n I j r 7 A LAN l.\'G CHARACT-«IbTlCa o'F 3 5nUTTL£ CUNF I 'JU* AT I QMS 14SE72 H iy= NA MSC-07159 i^N'-.ALLY FLOhN f'l^AL APPr(LiACri PA i'hS Fi'jK 0"dll£p< H r ... . MSC-07044. A$C "^T CGNTP.uL CAPA^iU'IY OF A PHKALLgL c.Vi-1 ahtTTL.E i4bE/2 h 197 v NA 37AI 74 t -SC— 07 2 «i4 P-ii-l. ifi. ShllTTLc- AbUr?T alullY USING S*'LYdACK 1 KA JECTUf? J ES Fort ir.JT'LE ri lyy NA I3!1l50u JD c;pAr£ SHUTTLE ^"dlTE'K vEnlCtE /ENG I N£ 470i\ VAi-ljUH iCjj H 20 U 1 J f A 7 4 TM X-2570 . . ABS^.a'SIFNT OF sOTENTiAL oJrFtT P"03Ltii3 3SV ?4bP/2 H NR on or 71 C p 3 2 U n U 0 3 H UR _onjL7u S3E jASE'LINE CnNF i GtJKA I'l UN CriA-xGE. UoP72 H 2UJ N? SSc c P L CAPAuIiiTY H 204

Ol'UI ?M 14aP72 H b &St4. 1A-.J SSE SLLtCTION r>l-' 1650 '-b F MAIN TURojiME OPE". TEl-P 14SP72 H SsE JUAL V >S S I v « L £ pKEounhtf? s T U u Y H 33c PKcSTAVT Pc.UpdLLANI COND i T i ON I MG oYSi'E.-l 14SP72 H S on ji 7 j SSE4*lAi7 14SP72 H iOy 35t dASELINu :£.Mt>INE UO-'ir iUURATION CMAiv^E H : k* 0x3' ftK VEHICLr/ i -Jw. 1 IxE 4/uK VACUUM I C 11 143P72 H _ 2U _ _ _ 27Jr.7) M A 7 4 I^Fl IviriT AE:?uApOu3T 1C EwvLnONVENl F0r< bbv H" J N? 2 ' J I 7 U 5 Ar:c STATION prit'J QPE^AriONS DEFINITION His AF 3 n A r, 7 4 30D SHUTTLE 3Y=lEf-l tttQU 1 ,t£i1ENTb H j SKC-2000 2ijbP72 H T 2^^J4 NR t * JI 74 RC1C07 CuN rJU i REx£,\ 1'S U C C O M t N. T-^E V£L 1 _22SP7. 2 Ha Ni 2 n .1 A 7 Vi MSC-S7070 A.)A! rb!3 OF SHiilTLE uRoIltrt rPriHY METHODS Ha N A 0 .1 A F 7 4 29SP72 H _^ 2ol MSC-U3329 AL T Pr.' K 2-1 JI 7u i^SC- u07 ib S-^A-t 3TATICXN r'-irUi O^E" A 1 I QMS OEF =nAs£ b a Xr I;-£AL (j.-it 6 btp. Frt£r>0''' AiHCiX.\FT SlrtULAIIOn w SL-! Q50C72 p 1 1 iJ . HA.... _.3 Arc; TU ? f.'ESlc' '' .STu Y~VCLS _li2»«l-l*3_-2»4»3 29SP72 H r a NA ?-iJI-7 i r

DOC . nor - - DATE StJ SKCE ilATF NUl-utR I.CV DUCoMENI JIT'Lt RtCD LOi-N riO.

H >•> 2 4 o M* 2UFfi* KhP-b-2 t)LU *0 5 IMSSlniN SlhULATiU.v + TRAiNifty FACILITY Al« fKAFFIC COujKUL SY^-DiGITAL oIHULATlCtv FACILITY 050CX2 H o kl 4 u A XrAL TiKc KAriAri S I HUL USi,\o APL DIGITAL CG'"'P LlN*S UbuC72 Ha ii4/ A C^rtP AR 1 SOM O.T 3 TY^^3 >JF MAnUAU CONf'KOLS-3nB OKDES C50CX2 p U ff-y^t i')E l'iAL SYS Ft|i'EC SY^ ii)uCX2 266 lnJF7i N7221204 AjV ofT'u'rt TECn t-"0ri DAT" rttf'lT SYS VOL i-SSV 3- STUDY 10UCX2 - ... M = 07^A7^ Cp,'i^;i56v« .i-Ll'Hi PROIiR.sM LA^bUA'jE^Lud p ._ 100CX2 2oo SH _ 7l AfC rOR fhE sc«,cNTIEo PAHT 1 ~ 1UUC72 "2.oV " ~ SH - 7 1 AfC r'OK THE &£../EKTiEa PArtT 2 iOOCX2 2XU 1 f Si- _ 7l AT - r'Ori Ihf. SE-..'=-NT Igo "-^'<'! 3 10UC72 2/1 A I Ort.**7i A71-J0061 ... PKO^ Ti£CH. FOr<.oEAL TlM->Ya FnRM EXPERIENCE « ExP?K,iT 10UC/2 2X2 10UCX2 Tv «r7i TSC-h"*«Xl COi-J^cP f'jAL Ht'TnURK f.OD=.L OF A \ H TRANS SYS 2X4 MA Ji71 Ci?ll3310 Virt'vjAL KEMOtVY SYS DcSlGN 10JC72 H pr %l ji7i Co u. < '< i cf-lCE WiT,.i £ATE,ND«dLE Cu--'?urER SYo Sli'lU^ATOH IOUCX2 MT ^^71 MTK-19Vb AIK^tCAFT MOCMJa COCiPoTER ? ,-< 0 u R A i'i SPEC ] r 1 CA f I^NS 100072 2XX .. - . A I . O'Sf'Sfirt HOM^jKAH FOP AiKCKAFT «Ubu£R. PEAL ..3E3 1 oN. 1LUCX2 AJ 100CX2 A I . •GSMfifi*' ' L'cSTriEABLE !) I f.pNS i CI N S r_0rf CONC£NTR.lC .CUNJRuL^ .... _ 10UCX2 '1! Jrfv Cn'lC637'o MAM'At COKTK'uL Ur OiMbTA'3Ll£ V£^ 1 CLE3-A I ii£sT .-l£ " I C ClJti 10UC72 " '£.01. ' ' "' Ai f,y RM-tO?7 Lj-jL'\E nhbtlUGE-. FOR 05o6u ASSEMBLY LA(vbUAG£ '"ROGRAMS 1UUCX2 MA JA7U CRI10445 ,-;ETi-'OU FfR UNleritO h ARUUAftE'-STr TW ASE DLSIGi-i 10UCX2 2co

1; i: 10 q 8 7 DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO,. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION '4-308 REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.19 Modular Display Electronics (MDE) 4 .,19.1 General Function The Modular Display Electronics (MDE) equipments in the Space Shuttle are a part of the Data Processing and Software Subsystem. The six associated cathode ray tube (CRT) displays and keyboards supplement primary instruments for GN&C computer data entry and readout and are also used for backup guidance and subsystem status.

The MDE concept was developed to satisfy two basic needs: (1) provide separation of routine display functions from critical GN&C computer control functions, and (2) provide data processing capabilities over and above GN&C computers for both management simplification and avoidance of systematic errors. A standard- ized CRT/Keyboard interface results from this approach and system growth can be more easily accommodated. A simplified block diagram is shown in Figure 4.J9.1-1.

1 ' • : t ! Figure 4.19.1-1 is a more detailed block diagram showing the evolution of the MDE concept. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE j-v / t.v i SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

MOE EVOLUTION

CN&C COMPUTERS CRT

GUIDAf.T.F LOW RATE 0 0 f LIGHT CONTROL FORMAT GENERA1DON MIGHRATE SENSOR PROCESSING FORVAT STQRAGf a a DISPLAY DATA KE VBOARD a D LOW RATE • • GENERATION ENCODING LO\VBATE o a •BUFFERING • SCALING .„, . f • BUFFERING * DA TA MASKING r^ *> ^'JS & £TLF TEST KEYBOARD

1 r

ANNUNCIATORS

oSEPARATION OF ROUTINE DISPLAY FUNCTIONS FROM CRITICAL CONTROL FUNCTION

e REQUIRES DISPLAY FUNCTIONS .+ ADDITIONAL PROCESSING

• STANDARD DESIGN • GROWTH CAPABILITY

Figure 4. 19.1-1 : DATElrW~n/79 THE S NGER COMPANY PAGE N0. A .0-, 0 lU/^u//i q IMIII AT ION pRnniirTq n v q OM ^ jj-v

REV. • • BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

. • \ vy / i Mn sg _1-V-O - ""• "* te ° ~~ \. pg eo ZT s ° • T I • f -1 P-J f-x " "" . CO CO .:M , aCOz xMxM CO W MM OJ CO CO O c« M ' O M O CJ H OJ SB •' ^• f*\ •"•"""•• • ' *""" ° 5- . • 2 w | >-ci oo j HW ?• o CO ^7 '•'.-.

,mttmmmt , „ , ,, i. f-| ^ !J ^_j • ' ' tf ^^ &>, Li . O M CC ^ £ O O c< A cr; rH r.l tc O <*>—_^>>-, O O £-J ^ M" **• ^ ^ v • __JN- HO *~ "^ A i ^7 • ' o w t r-jjM • ' g

MD E FUNCTIONA L EVOLUTIO N J - o J~i < j^r.i o o M ^ .. ,co .. i «~rT"i"" p} M S ^ >: « ** 0 <-"'-1^. rf rf^V^ - ' ?' £ . M o ^ LLcLi_ • 13 . T . A i

T-l 1 TFaAsra, ^ V 4 1 *i5i C4 • i'i " | K i , V %r* V\ r-l^T r^ •-3 M r s $ 5° — P3 r"P"^-pj ffo c CC ^C f-, rr: ;.-:i~i co E-< K o ^' ^ i^ dijTizi P- i [=: :.-: olo oic-< P« i^~- ;•: on o W ff co ;-=: «

00 C1 '. ,'•..•• •'/ ; '. CO u_ THE SINGER COMPANY DAT PAGE NO, 4_311 fo/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Four MDE's are used in the baseline system to provide GN&C Display/Keyboard interfaces, performance monitor, and back- up guidance display processing. Three MDE's are interconnected with GN&C computers to provide prime GN&C display and control capability on any combination of the three forward CRT's/Key- boards. Backup guidance displays are normally presented on the center CRT and performance monitoring page formats on the aft CRT. All MDE's are tape cartridge reloadable in non-time criti- cal periods. Refer to Figure 4.19-3.

Significant hardware and software growth capability is available through the addition of two PMS computers (same type as GN&C computer) and using MDE 3 and 4 in the same relationship as MDE 1 and 2 to GN&C computers. Two additional MDE's are used in the payload system for a total of six in the Orbiter vehicle. THE StNGER COMPANY DATE10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-312 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

MDE PROGRAM LOADING UJSAGE

FUNCTION

6/U GUIDANCE

PERFORMANCE MONITOR

MDE TAPE CART. «LOADABLE

Figure 4,19'. 1-3 DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-313 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

^ujbsystem ManaRement Onboard and ground data/control relationships shown (Fig .4.20.1-^ illustrate how all data users have access to the same data. Up to four unique formats are available in the stored program PCM master unit to accommodate user unique requirements. Tape reload capability for MDE's is available during flight, but is used only in non-time-critical situations. A prerecorded PCM track is available on the PCM recorder for end-to-end ground self test of the MDE/CRT/Annunciator combinations. Continuous self monitoring of the PCM subsystem is accomplished through the Use of-standard analog and digital words generated within the remote units. ':-,...... •:-••::.-;i Figure 4.19L.1-4. -•.•-.-.-.-:.::•:•. •.-.;: SUBSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

~»«D ""] TAPE CART. 1 CTR i ! I" ST*T,ON RELOAD MDf L™. MDE I COMPUTER E COMPUTER SWITCH ZH- I'D Pfl-Sllf US! A ' . —i KM J STATION RECORDER f*\ . I X^S . ? - t ^i 1 - 1 CRT LOOP ! r RECORDER 1 -ftMNUNCIAlOK lIGHTSj

. COMM FORMAT COMROl i S'S i

T Cdlrt COHTBOl CBOUND D THE SINGER COMPANY lW20/72 PAGE NO-. 4.3 1A SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.19.2 MDE System Operation and Interfaces Processing of data for display on the subsystem CRT and for subsystem performance and operation monitoring is accomplished by MDE Subsystem Display Processor set which includes a modular, serial-output, address-programmable PCM data selector/buffer, a small stored-program processor CPU-I/0, and lamp driving logic. The equipment interfaces with the composite PCM stream, with an alphanumeric display/keyboard set which has been loaded with format skeletons for subsystem display, and with a number of fault status and agree/disagree annunciators lo- cated on the subsystem panels. There is also an interface x*ith the vehicle Caution & Warning system for use in sleep periods or at times when the subsystem panels are unattended. Functional organization of the equipment is shown in Figure 4.19.1-2. 4.19.2.1 Display Unit (DUV The unit employs a small (4x4 inches usable), high- brightness CRT to present up to 18 line of 24 alphanumeric characters each. Located on the DU bezel are 16 line designator pushbuttons used in conjunction with the keyboard for display selection and data entry. The face of the DU, with a. typical GN&C format displayed, is shown in * Figure 4.19 .2-1. The top line of the format is normally used for page titles and numbers; lines 1 through 16.for data names, data and units; and the bottom line is reserved for keyboard data entry and verifi- cation, and for computer error messages. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE N0- 4-315 ON PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

/RENDEZVOUS-TP1 15 ! GET1 118:41:15 TF1 37.21 JEHEJTA .'27.00 ;DEG APOGEE 270.00 NM

DELTA 46.2 DELTA VX .27.3 FPS DELTA VY 19.7 FPS DELTA VZ , ": 11.8 FPS Y +1.22 NM Y DOT +4.71 FPS PS1 , 1.35 DEG -GET1 TPF 119-: 15:4.0 12 (DATA ENTRY/ERROR MSG) UiJ fl' ••fcmi.ii> .

5

Figure 4. .19. 2-1 Alphanumeric Display CRT DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-316 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO. 4.19-2.2 Keyboard A 4 x 8 key matrix is used to control the CRT display,select . . * • index and data pages, and communicate with the interfacing computer. The standard keys-are zero through 9, +, -, Decimal Point, Enter, Resume Proceed, End, and Clear. The remaining function keys are reformattable

for flight and subsystem display applications. See Figure 4,. 19.2-2. ''/

System Operation ; The Display/Keyboard set operates in two basic modes, an index mode and a data mode. Index mode operation is initiated through actuation of an INDEX key on the keyboard; initially the top index page is called from a fixed location in MDE memory and displayed. Each line on this page represents either a subindex page or a data page. A one- - selection may then be made by pushing the line selector push-button opposite the desired page title. Alternatively, data pages may be called directly by page number from the keyboard by actuating a PAGE SELECT key, or may be paged through consecutively. When data page selection i^ made via the index tree, the display shifts to data mode as soon as a specific data page is selected. In the data mode, the MDE assembles a data page from a fixed skeleton called from a selected MDE memory location and variable data requested from the selected intern

i facing computer. The request to the computer is identified by data pag^ • . i number, which is decoded in the computer to initiate routines which select and convert constants from memory and results of on-going compu- tations, and assemble this data in line order for transmission to the DATE 10/20/72 SINGER-GENERAL PRECISION, INC, PAGE NO. 4-31? LINK DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

\

Figure 4.M9-2-2 THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-318 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

CRT. This cycle is repeated twice per second for update. The page number is sent with each update block and compared with the called page number in the MDE to assure data/format skeleton compatibility. By a combination of field masking techniques and special instructions, the average alphanumeric data page skeleton occupies less than 120 16-bit words in MDE memory and requires approximately 30 16-bit words of data from the computer for a full page update. Actuation of the numeric and sign keys on the keyboard when in the data mode is interpreted as a data entry to the computer. The data goes into a buffer line in MDE memory and comes up on the bottom scratchpad line on the display as it is entered; the interfacing compu- ter does not take cognizance of the data .until it has been inspected, its disposition identified by a discrete from one of the display line selector buttons, and the ENTER key actuated. The computer then evaluates the entered data for acceptability. If the data is acceptable the computer clears the scratchpad line and substitutes the entered value for the value in its memory, causing the same number to appear in the selected data line on the next update. If the data is unaccepta- ble (not a program constant, wrong value, no disposition, etc.) the computer sends a discrete to light an OPERATOR ERROR annunciator and j i an error code to initiate display of an error message on the scratchpad | ... | line. If during the execution of programs the computer encounters ' problems, it can light a PROGRAM ALARM annunciator and send an error code to initiate display of an error message on the scratchpad line. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/7 I PAGE NO. 4-319 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

The keyboard has priority in that error messages will not be forced- displayed while keyboard entry is in process, but will come up if the operator clears the scratchpad line. Error messages are stored in the MDE memory and addressed by conversion of error codes into memory locations. 4.JL9.2.3 IOB Adapter The MDE is capable of interfacing with any of three computers one at a time. The IOB Adapter, therefore, contains the driver and receiver circuits required to send and accept signals from 3 computers. The selection of the one active computer interface is based upon dis- crete signals received in the MDE from a panel control switch. The com- puter selection logic samples the selection control discretes and electrically ties the active computer interface to the remaining MDE logic. Operation of a function key on the keyboard, such as enter, end, proceed, clear, etc., causes the MDE computer to initiate a commandj or a data transfer. The computer will first issue a read-I/0 address command which causes the MDE to transfer the memory address where the last encoded key action is stored. (Keyboard entries, including line/ column select, are stored sequentially in a fixed portion of the MDE j

i core memory.) By performing a subtraction, the computer then initiates t read commands to the MDE beginning at the start of keyboard entry storage up to the last entry which initiated the transfer. The computer then issues a write command to reset the keyboard entry table to blanks. DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-320 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. This has the effect of clearing line 17 the scratch pad line. The com- puter then operates upon the operator request. The Computer IOB Adapter contains the logic required to communicate with the selected computer. It is capable of responding to read or write commands issued by the computer. It is also capable of generating an interrupt to the computer when commanded to initiate a transfer. . .. . ; 4.19 .2.4 Keyboard Adapter '-- The Keyboard Adapter receives parallel data from the keyboard which is encoded to define which of the keys on the keyboard or display unit has been depressed. The keyboard initiates data transfers by raising a request line to indicate that a key has been pressed. The Keyboard Adapter acknowledges the keyboard input and then stores the data in the MDE memory.

For computer-destined data, the KA notifies the I/O Multiplex which interrupts the computer and requests a read of the desired data. An area in the MDE computer memory is reserved for keyboard service data **=». For this data, the computer does a special formatting operation for processing and display on the data entry (scratchpad) line. If the Enter Key is depressed, indicating that the scratchpad line should be sent to the computer, the computer reads the scratchpad locations in

,4 MDE memory and then clears them. This has the effect of transferring the data from the scratchpad line to the selected data line. The

scratchpad line can also be cleared from the keyboard. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-321 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.19K2.5 Symbol Generator The Symbol Generator is comprised of digital and analog circuitry which controls the presentation of display formats. It is used to generate alphanumeric characters. The refresh and generation of the symbols are controlled by a list of instruction words which are stored in the MDE core storage. The digital instruction words are processed by. converting them to the x-deflection, y-deflection, and z- axis video signals required to drive the CRT display. The Symbol Generator provides the following display capabilities: Generate alphanumeric characters from stroke information stored in the MDE memory. . - .. . . Format characters in type mode or random positions. . Growth capability for drawing vectors of any length. Position characters at any location on a 512 by 512 matrix Present a uniform display by controlling the intensity of the characters (and veceors) . Operate in a typewriter mode associated with either the X or Y direction. ., - - - • -'. -;.- , 4.19,.2.6 PCM Adapter . j

i This element accepts a Manchester biphase coded data stream j . j at rates up to 100 KB/S, strips sync from the stream to provide frame i and word sync and bit clock, and sequentially selects, buffers and transmits RZ-coded logic-level data to the processor. Both the incoming THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE N0.^322 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

PCM address and the outgoing data are buffered for at least one PCM word interval in order that contiguous words in the stream may be selected. 4.J.9 .2.7 Processor CPU - I/O The processor is a low-cost general-purpose, high-speed, core- .memory .machine .which basically executes four tasks: data selection, display scaling, data limit checking and system self-test. The memory is modular up to 16K, 16-bit words. The processor retains in its re- loadable memory the PCM address tables for selection of up to 1,000 measurement; the denormalizing constant tables for scaling of up to 1,000 measurements for display, together with the display address tables for-up to 50 12-line tabular alphanumeric CRT display pages; the pre- determined operating limits for limit-checking and logic comparison of up to 600 analog and discrete measurements, together with annunciator address tables for up to 150 fault status annunciators; and the program to accomplish the four tasks defined above. The limit-checking operation may apply up to <£:h.ree selectable sets of limits to monitored measure- ments, depending on subsystem configuration and/or mission phase. Further details are to be found in Section 4.^19.3 and 419. .4. 4.19.2.8 Lamp Buffer Adapter \. i • This electronics accepts and decodes outputs words from the CPU to determine which of the fault status annunciators should be activated. A provision is incorporated to hold annunciators activated^ until acknowledged by the crew. The decoded and processed discretes DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO.4-323 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

are outputted to the annunciators via lamp drivers to provide the required power switching. 4.,-J-2.2.9 System Operation CRT displays are requested by index tree or page number via the keyboard as described in section 4., 19.2.1. In either case the page f ; number code is decoded by the processor to access the appropriate denormalizing constant and display address tables for the selected page. The processor then addresses and selects the requested data, converts the data and the PCM frame time into BCD-coded engineering units format, assembles it in display line order and transmits it to the display set ajs described previously. This operation is repeated an integral number of PCM frames later for update; the number.is selectable to achieve a nominal twice-per-second update with either real-time or tape-delayed non-real-time input data. , Measurement selection for limit-checking will be established by a predefined PCM address table. The processor will select from its memory the appropriate limit and status tables for the selected operational phase and subsystem configuration, and will ordinarily make a limit check or a state comparison for all selected measurements. However, if a known off-nominal measurement repeatedly triggers the alarm, the processor can be instructed via the keyboard to disregard the condition of that measurement until it is notified to the contrary, j The processor will maintain a table of inhibited measurements for display upon request. ' i DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N04-324 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Limit checking can be done at repetition rates up to about 10 per second. However, the processor will normally be instructed to verify that an off-nominal condition persists for a number of consecutive data samples (2 to 5 for most measurements) before outputting an alarm discrete. When an off-nominal condition is verified, the processor "will -0«'t*p»t ••d'i«C'r&te-s .-,to -the.„annunciator Logic .identifying the appro- priate individual fault status annunciator, and to the master fault annunciator, and will write the number of the display page containing the offending measurement(s) on the scratchpad line. If the appropriate display page is up, or when it is brought up, the processor will identify the data it hos evaluated as off-nominal by requesting a "bug" symbol on the appropriate display line which will flag the measurement(s) as out-of-tolerance high or low. A performance monitor status table will be maintained, to be displayed in page format on request, listing in chronological order the measurements which have been abnormal since the table x*as last cleared and indicating what that status was (high, low, off, failedv-etc.) . In each major cycle of processing for display and performance monitor, the Processor executes a routine which checks the data, the system hardware, and itself. A BITE annunciator is provided which is normally held off by a pulse train from the Processor I/O. However, should the PCM data fail, or a check of calibration words or PMC BITE discretes from the data stream indicate "no-go", or the processor self- test routine indicate "no-go", or the processor power fail, the output DATElO/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-325 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. B 1 NGHAMTON . NEW YORK REP. NO.

pulse train will cease and the BITE annunciator will illuminate. If the processor itself is still healthy, it will send an error code to the display set to initiate display of an error message identifying the problem. THE SINGER COMPANY : DA PAGE NO. 4.326 %/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.19.3 MDE Computers ...... There are presently two different computers being used for the MDE CPU application. For the non GN&C Performance Monitoring applica- tion, two IBM Model APlOl's will be used. A detailed description of this computer is to be found in section 4.18.3. For the GN&C MDE's and Tor the "Payload "System"MDE"ls, small "IBM'type *SP-1 computer is to be used. A detailed description of this computer follows. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N0 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4. 193 MDE Computer Type SP-1

Machine Type General purpose, stored program, simplex Organization Number System Binary, fixed point, two's complement, fractional Operation Full parallel (16 bits) Data Word Length 16-bit word, including sign; 32-bit doubleword, including sign Instruction Word Length 16 bits . .Number.of Instructions 41 •.'... Typical Execution Times Add 2.7 ps Multiply 5.7 ps Divide 8.0 ps Average Instruction Execution Rate 350,000 operations/second Registers 4 (A, Q, and B registers and instruction counter)

Main . Type Ferrite magnetic core, nonvolatile, random access, destructive readout Storage Capacity •< 4096:8192; 12,288; or 16,334 17-bit words Modularity 4096 17-bii words per pluggable module t Cycle Time 1. 33 ps (write or read/restore) . Access Time 600 ns Special Features Power transient protection, separate sense winding, 2-1/2D organization. temperature compensation

1/6 Parallel Externally Initiated Direct memory access; buffered I/O Channel Program Initiated Direct I/O ' • Data Interface 16 bits plus address and control; single-ended TTL interface Maximum Data Transfer Rate 150,000 to 600,000 words/secono.

Logic Class Monolithic integrated Circuits Type Transistor/transistor logic (TTL) and medium-scale integration (MSI) Package Flatpacks: 14, 16, and 24 leads '

Power Primary Power 1 15/200 V AC, 3-phase, 400 Hz, 72 W average for standard structure. System c 31 to 52 W for basic assembly (28 V DC primary input power optional) . - - Output Regulated •••••.. DC +5, -5.+ 12V DC Features Overvoltage and overcurrent protection, transient protection, power sequencing pluggable modular construction

Physical Standard Structure Basic Assembly

Volume 0.35 ft3 0.06 ft3 < Weight 18.1 Ib, for 4K storage 3.6 Ib, for 4K storage 03 21.7 Ib, for 16K storage 00 Construction Plug-in modules used throughout Cooling Indirect air. conductive Environment Meets or exceeds MIL-E-5400. Class 2X DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4.

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

Externally Controlled 115/200 VAC A'JE - Aerospace Ground Direct Mernorv Access (DMA) 3.i. 400 Hi Equipment Buffered I O (or 28 V DC1 SAR • Slordijc Address Reqister Interrupt SDR • Storage Data Register Program Controlled Direct I O

Figure 4,19 .3-1 Computer Block Diagram DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-329 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Central Processing Unit

The central processing unit (CPU) The 16-bit immediate operand is Execution contains the logic necessary to formed from the B field (bits 0 Instruction Times (us) fetch, decode, and execute instruc- through 7 of the operand) and ' tions and to perform the necessary the displacement field (bits-8 Logical Compare High 2.7 arithmetic, logical, and other data- through 15 of the operand). Compare Low 2.7 processing operations. All opera- Compare Equal 2.7 tions are full 16-bit parallel, with Indirect addressing is provided in AND 2.7 a basic cycle time of 333 nanc- two formats: AND to Storage 3.0 'seconds. Sixteen-bit parallel in- OR 2.7 terfaces are provided for the I/O • Indirect Exclusive OR 2.7 module, main storage, computer memory loader/verifier, and op- • Indirect and Tally. Branch Exclusive OR to Storage 3.0 erator control panel. Branch Out Indirect addressing permits full Unconditional 1.7 Instruction Format address specification without al- Branch Unconditional 1.7 An extensive set of instructions tering the base register. Also, in- Branch on A Negative 1.7 is provided for arithmetic, logi- direct addresses may be shared by Branch on A Zero 1.7 cal, branching, data moving, and several instructions, thus conserv- Branch and Link 4.0 I/O operations. Double-precision ing storage. The Indirect and Tally add and subtract, together with addressing mode automatically in- Data Load A 2.7 the multiply and divide opera- * crements the indirect address word Move Store A 3.0 tions, provide for supporting ex- following each use, providing the Load Base 2.7 tended precision applications. programmer with excellent index- Store Base 3.0 ing and data arraymanipulation Modify Base 2.7 A 16-bit instruction format is used potential. Load Q 2.7 to combine storage efficiency and Store Q 3.0 powerful addressing capability. Direct, indirect, relative, and im- Register Reset Interface 1.7 mediate addressing modes are pro- Operations Base to A 1.7 vided in the short format (SRS) A to Base 1.7 Execution instruction. Shift A Right Instruction Times (ps) Arithmetic 1.7+* SRS Shift A Left Logical 1.7+* Of 8 \1 DISP ^=* Arithmetic Add 2.7 I I 1 I I ! ! ! I I I 1 Shift A, Q Right Add Double 4.0 Arithmetic 1.7+' • Subtract 2.7 Shift A, Q Left Logical 1.7+' The B field specifies whether or Subtract Double . 4.0 BITE Failure 1.7 not the base register is used during Add to Storage 3.0 address generation. The M field Tally (Skip if zero) 3.0 Input/ In Service 3.0 specifies the addressing mode to Tally I/O 3.0 Output Out Service 2.7 be used. Direct mode addresses Multiply 5.7 Direct In 2.7 lie first 512 locations in main Divide 8.0 Direct Out 2.7 storage. Relative mode provides an address displacement with re spect to either the instruction •Shift length (ri): add n/6if shift even; :ounter or the base register (B). (n+3)/6. if odd. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-330 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Input/Output

A fast'para"el channel interacts • Direct Memory Access (DMA) Direct I/O,— Under control of the with the high-speed CPU and main I/O — The I/O device provides a CPU instruction stream, a com- storage to provide excellent 16-bit main storage address; 16 mand is sent to an I/O device, and throughput and to feature perfor- bits of data are written into-or one 16-bit word of data is written mance, operation, and an I/O in- read from this storage location. into or read from the device. The terface that are upward-compatible The DMA I/O mode is initiated Direct I/O mode is initiated by the with other System/4 Pi machines, by the I/O device. A CPU lock- program. The data transfer rate is .such..as«the.l.BM-AP-1 .computer. -out-feature significantly increases a function of the operation fol- the data transfer rate, providing lowing the transfer and may be as Three I/O modes are provided for a maximum data transfer rate of high as 175,000 words per second. the transfer of data and command 600,000 words per second. functions between the SP-1 com- In addition, an external interrupt puter and peripheral equipment: •Buffered I/O - The I/O device is provided, allowing external provides an "address tag," used equipment to cause the CPU to to access a channel control word suspend current operations, store (CCW) containing count and ad- the current contents of the in- dress; a single data word or a struction counter, and load a new block of data words is written instruction count from the storage into or read from main storage. locations specified by the I/O de- The Buffered I/O mode is initiated vice. The I/O device provides the by the I/O device. A maximum interrupt service routine address, data transfer rate of 175,000 permitting the support of multiple words per second may be reached interrupts. The I/O device also when the CPU is locked out. implements any priorities required.

Parallel Externally Initiated Direct Memory Access: 600,000 words/s (maximum) Channel Buffered I/O: 175,000 words/s (maximum)

Program Initiated Direct I/O: 175,000 words/s (maximum)

Data Interface 16 bits plus address and control; single-ended TTL interface

Maximum Data Transfer Rate 150,000 to 600,000 words/s

Interrupt One external interrupt line (multiple interrupts may be handled) DATE1Q/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-331 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

I/O Interface The interface between the I/O channel and I/O devices is shown in the accompanying illustration. Each I/O device has unique Service Request and Service Acknowledge lines. Two.pairs of these lines are built into the standard CPU and I/O logic pages, supporting two devices. More lines may be added on the custom I/O page if support for additional I/O devices is de- sired. The interface lines are im- plemented in standard TTL logic.

Either a single peripheral I/O de- vice or a control unit may be at- tached to the I/O interface. Each control unit, addressed and con- trolled by a channel control word - (CCW), may interface with as many as 127 peripheral I/O de- vices.

SPJ • Data Out Bui Computer • Zero Count • Branch Out • Command Out • Data Acknowledge

• Data In Bus • Input • Direct Memory Access • External Interrupt • Data Request • Lockout • System Reset

• Service Request • Service Acknowledge • 750 kHz Clock

Figure 4. 19.3-2 DAT THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-332 fO/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

SP-1 Computer Support Software

The SP-1 Support Programming The SP-1 assembler gives the pro- The linkage editor is used to com- System (SPS) provides the appli- grammer a symbolic source lan- bine object program modules into cation programmer with a set of guage that produces storage-effi- a core image load module for the aids designed to effectively reduce cient, high-throughput programs SP-1 and to resolve all necessary the time required to get the appli- using the effective instruction set program linkages. The linkage cation programs online and to defined by the computer architec- editor input to the SP-1 simulator support program modifications ture. An excellent macroprogram program includes not only the core and maintenance. Continuing a capability significantly reduces the image load module, but symbolic field-proven concept, the SP-1 • repetitive coding required of the reference data as well. SPS provides the user with an as- application programmer. sembler, a linkage editor, and a The simulator dynamically ana- simulator program: Identical in most respects to the lyzes the SP-1 program modules widespread, well known System/ at the instruction word level and Assembler — Uses an efficient 360 assembly language, the SP-1 executes any given set of SP-1 in- symbolic language. Allows mod- assembler requires minimum re- structions prepared by the linkage ular programming and testing. training of experienced program- editor. Facilities such as dumps, Assembles relocatable programs. mers and provides early online re- traces, and snaps are available Provides syntax error detection lease of new trainees, thus signifi- under the control of a user-written and identification. Allows macro- cantly reducing training costs. simulation control program. processing and conditional assem- High-quality user and programmer bly. Produces listed output. manuals assist programmers in the effective use of the SP-1 assembler Linkage Editor — Combines and language. Programming rules and relocates program modules as- techniques, such as modular pro- sembled at separate times. Re- gramming (C-sects, D-sects, etc.), solves program linkages. Creates syntax, macroprogram generation, input for the simulator. Creates symbols and labels, source instruc- core image object programs for tions, comments and continuation loading SP-1 computer storage. lines, and subroutine linkage, are in most cases identical to System/ 'Simulator — Allows SP-1 program 360 operations. analysis. Facilitates dynamic sim- ulation through a user-written con- trol program. Provides user access to simulated computer object pro- gram data (with absolute and sym- bolic reference). Allows object program correction. Provides pro- gram debugging options (dump, snap, trace). Enables simulation of I/O and interrupt initiation and response. DA THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4.333 T$/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Option Summary

Two major options are available for extending the capability and adaptability of the SP-1 computer:

• Expanded Main Storage - The minimum configuration SP-1 com- puter has a 4K-word main,storage.. Storage may be expanded in 4K increments to 36K words by in- serting additional pluggable 4K storage pages into the structure. Self-contained timing and storage logic require no changes to the CPU and interface design. This modification can be installed in the field.

•Custom I/O — Space is provided, and the necessary control signals and data buses are included, for the insertion of a custom I/O module, individually designed to meet application requirements not covered by the standard broad-use, high-speed parallel channel. DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO.4.334 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.19.4 MDE Software and Systems Applications

4.19.4.1 MDE Computer Software Software shall be provided to execute in the MDE Computers and shall perform the following functions: Limit check analog parameters Verify correct discrete status Communicate results of the above two functions to CRT and panel annunciators.

t i Display crew selected subsystem status formats on CRT. The combination of the above software functions along with the assumed hardware configuration will allow the crew to verify and make judgments as to subsystem status. The software shall consist of a minimal control program, limit checking routines, display support routines and tables. Addi- tionally, predefined format skeletons shall be supplied.

MDE Processor Control Program The control program for the MDE processor schedules the processor software tasks for execution during a predefined fixed time slice processing cycle occurring every TBD ms, pr at a preselected

integral PCM frame count.. The MDE processor cycle is shown in. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE /20/72 PAGE NO. 4-335 10 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Figure 4.19-8. Two control program subprograms, cycle control and data Input, are executed prior to dispatching the performance monitor and display processing applications programs. Execution of data output and self-check subprograms complete this cycle. The control program subprograms are discussed in the following paragraphs: 1. "Cycl'e'Control - *The -cycle control function determine major cycle timing. It is presently planned that the occurrence of PCM master frames will be counted and that the processing cycle will be entered after that count reaches a value of two (a measurement sample rate and program iteration rate of 2/second was assumed for sising purposes). The counter (or clock) is reset immediately before .the major cycle is entered. 2. Data Input - Data input processing consists of initiating an I/O sequence to read the required PCM measurements into the processor main storage. Discrete measurements are assumed to be 1 bit each, and analog measurements are assumed to be 8 bits each. For sizing purposes, it was assumed that 300 analog and 300 discrete measurements are obtained for non GN&C performance monitor and display processing. •- .

3. Data Output - The data output subprogram transfers the display update data to the MDE and transfers on/off signals to the

subsystem annunciators as determined by the performance monitor software THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 4_336 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

MDE and annunciator output lists are generated by the display processing and performance monitor application programs, respectively. These lists are processed by the control program to effect data output. 4. Self-Check - The self-check subprogram is executed as the last task in each processing cycle. Main storage, internal CPU, .,.and, .1/0 .£uact,i.o,ns ,,a.r,e ..tested . .Anomalies detected by self-check are communicated by an external discrete indication and/or an error code to the MDE. DATElQ/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-337 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Figure 4.19.4-1 - MDE -PROCESSOR OVERALL FLOW. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-338 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. 4.19.4.2 GN&C MDE System Application 4;19.4.2.1 GN&C Display Systems Software The Display subprogram in the GN&C MDE computers provides the • capability to selectively support specific crew requested displays. This support includes arithmetic conversion, BCD conversion, formatting and transmission of GN&C data to the crew station displays. For output data -febe tJis-p-l-ay Tsapport "soffcwa-re-has-the -capabili-ty to process one parameter per line for twelve lines on each of fifty pages. In addition, the display software also processes input data passed from the crew station to the GN&C MDE computers via an alphanumeric keyboard. The processing of the input data includes interpretation, conversion, limit testing and reasonableness testing. The input processing function is capable of processing 100 parameters. The display system subprogram is capable of generating alphanumeric display messages and a vector symbol genera- tion. 1. Display System Subprogram. The Display System Software performs the function of presenting the Oribter GN&C system status infor raation to the crew via a combination CRT and keyboard (DSKY) displays. The DSKY consists of numeric and special character keys which the crew will use to communicate with the Display subprogram. The CRT display will accommodate 18 lines of alphanumeric data with 24 characters per data line. The 18 lines of data are dedicated to 1 title line, 16 measurement data lines, and 1 scratch pad line. Fifty CRT page formats, each containing 16 lines of data, are required to accommodate the GN&C display requirements. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-339

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

2. Page Formats. The 24 characters for each of the 16 measurement lines is subdivided into a group of 12 characters for measurement identification, 5 characters (including decimal point) for data, 4 characters for units, and 3 blank separator characters. The page skeleton information containing the page title, measurement ID's and units is contained in the MDE computer memory. The MDE memory contains 8K,- 16 bit words. The memory required to perform data display calculations is included in the GN&C Display program. 3. Display Selection. The keyboards are each redundant. Data entered on each DSKY is directed toward each of the 3 GN&C compu- ters simultaneously - so that all programs receive the same input data. Either display can be switched to read the outputs of any one of the 3 GN&C computers. The program structure is designed such that a different page of display data can be directed toward each of the CRT displays. Each DSKY can be coded to direct either a common or a unique display to each of the CRT displays. As data is entered on the DSKY, the MDE will interrogate the DSKY and display the keyed data on the scratch pad line of the CRT display. The program will not react to keyed data requests until the ENTER button is depressed. j

.... i 4. Input Data Checks. The - program will perform input data { ....-•' • \ tests on a selected set of DSKY input data. The tests will attempt to j

i insure that erroneous or unrealistic data is not accepted by the program. In the event of a failure of the input data tests, the prograrr DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4.340 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

will notify the crew of the failure condition and will not act on the entered data. The crew has the option of overriding the test results and forcing the program to accept the data. The input data checks in- clude 50 limit tests and 50 reasonablesness tests. 5. Display Types. The program will provide for 50 unique data .page displays where each data page contains 12 system measurements, 1 title line and 1 scratch pad line. The 50 display pages are further defined as follows: (a) 15 Systems Status Display Pages - To provide for 125 GN&C system measurements including 40 analog, 60 discrete and 25 system status measurements. (b) 35 Parametric Data Displays - To provide a capability for displaying approximately 400 measurements, internal computer calcu- lations, or program constants. The 400 lines of parametric display data are not presently defined. 6. Failure Indications. Any system failures detected by the GN&C Flight program will be presented to the crew via a caution and warning indication in addition to a failure message on the scratch pad line of the CRT display. The scratch pad line^ will inform the crew of the failure type and present a page number to be entered via the keyboard to obtain a full set of CRT display data for the failed sub- system. Multiple failure indications will be provided for by the

program. : DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-341 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.19.4.2.2 GN&C Performing Monitoring Software X 1. Analog Processing - A Performance Monitor module will be provided to verify that all GN&C system analog parameters are within a predefined set of high/low limits. An out-of-tolerance condition will cause notification to be made to the crew via subsystem annunciators j ~and/.or .CRT .displays. The current .estimate is that 40 analog parameters will be processed by the routine. Each parameter will have four sets of high/low .limits as an average. One set of these limits will be active during the various flight pases or modes.

The GN&C MDE computer control program will perform all

input checks at either a 25/second or 2/second rate. The input data sources are the input buffers. Upon completion of the input via the executive program, the control program will dispatch the Performance Monitoring tasks. After routine initialization, active interrogation of the current para- meter value to the active limits is initiated. If no parameter is founc out of tolerance^-.all parameters will quickly be processed and control passed back to the control program. . • - If a parameter is found out of^tolerance, a test is made to determine if the parameter has been out of tolerance "n" times. Thej

, i currently assumed value of "n" is two.' This test prevents noise from causing superfluous no-go indications. If "n" successive conditions have been encountered, the type of crew notification required is interrogated. If an annunciator activation is specified, an 8-bit DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE MO.A.OAO SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

annunciator address code is placed on the control program output data list for transmission to the annunciator panel at the end of the processing cycle. Measurements that are out of tolerance can be designated as a disregard for error notification by the crew. This capability is useful for stopping continuous error displays caused by invalid measurement readings. The disregard designation is made by requesting display of the format containing the measurement in error and utilizing the line designator switch on the MDE to identify the measurement. A cancel disregard designation is made in a similar manner. If a CRT display is specified several actions occur. First, an indicator is set in the format skeleton associated with the out of tolerance parameter. When this format (page) is displayed, the appropriate parameter will have appended the out of tolerance flag which allows the crew to quickly see those out of tolerance conditions associated with the subsystem. For analog measurements, the flag vrill indicate the direction, high or low. of the out of tolerance condition. *ti». The routine will then request a flag message display which will appear on the scratch pad (line 14) of the display the next time the Display Support routine updates the current display. The messajge i will notify the crew that Performance Monitoring has detected an out of j tolerance condition and will specify the page number on which the condition can be viewed. If the scratch pad is currently being used by the crew to enter a command, the display will be delayed until the DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. • 4-.343 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

area is free. A related annunciator will notify the crew of the condition. The scratch pad line may then be cleared via the keyboard to free it for the error message. In addition, a one line message is added to a queque of messages that reflect a summary of all out of tolerance conditions existing at the current time. These one line messages are displayed when the crew requests the Performance Monitor Status page and will re- flect the 12 most recent out of tolerance conditions. Earlier mal- functions may be viewed by "paging" through the Performance Monitor Status displays via a special keyboard command. Provision will be made to accommodate up to 64 of the one line malfunction messages (4 x 16). If both panel and CRT crew notification action is specified for a particular parameter, both of the above described panel and CRT sequeces occur. When a parameter that has previously been out of tolerance comes within tolerance, the converse of the above steps is performed. The annunciator i|^reset and/or the one line message in the Performance Monitoring Status format is purged and the remaining entries compressed. The crew notification scratch pad line message is removed if applicable. •+ The above discussion described the comparison of the current parameter value to the active limits. The active limits are j established by a separate module identified as the Performance Monitor | Phase Initializer. This module,is called by the control program upon flight phase changes, or as commanded by the crew. Additionally, DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO.4-344 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

measurement limit changes required for vehicle status change (e.g., engine firing) will be effected by monitoring discrete signals for the change in status. The Performance Monitor Phase initializer will have tables that associate the phase to the appropriate limits to use for each of the parameters for that phase. The tables have been sized to accomnioj- date an average of four sets of high/low limits. 2.. Discrete Processing - The Performance Monitor module will be provided to verify the correct status of certain subsystem in- put discretes Similar to the analog processing module, if a discrete is found to be in an incorrect state, the crew will be notified via paneIs and/or CRT displays. The current assumption is that 60 GN&C discrete parameters will be monitored at a 25/secon9 or 2/second rate. The Executive control program will perform all input opera- tion and pass control to the discrete processing module. After module initialization, groups of 16 discretes will be tested to determine if any one of the 16 discretes has changed. If none have changed, other groups are tested until the scan is complete. If a discrete has changed a table entry is interrogated to -« determine the type notification specified. Again, this can be via annunciators, CRT, or both. If annunciator notification is .specified, \ an eight bit annunciator address code and an associated on/off bit are ! quequed for output. DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-345 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV-. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

If CRT notification was specified, an "allow/disallow" table is interrogated to determine if the change was allowable. If so, no additional action is taken and the scan of other discretes continues. Presumably, the discrete for the current phase is not considered a part of the performance monitoring. If the discrete change is not allowed and is currently in the incorrect state, the same sequence as was done in analog processing is performed. The "out of tolerance" indicator is set in the format skeleton on which the discrete appears, a notification is placed on the scratch pad line, and a one line summary message is inserted in the Performance Monitoring Status format buffer. The use of this presentation is the same as described in the analog description. If the discrete change is to the correct state the converse of the above sequence is performed. The initial discrete status and the control routines access to the proper "allow/disallow" and "should be" tables is established by the Performance Monitor Phase Initializer. This is the same routine mentioned earlier in the analog processing section. A set of allow/ disallow and shouid-be tables are provided for each flight phase. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4_346 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.19 .4.3 Performance Monitor (PM) System The PM system consists of two MDE processors dedicated to the monitor and display of non-GN&C systems status or to the solution and display of the backup guidance and navigation function. One of the PM MDE processors capabilities is obtained by time sharing the center console GN&C MDE, between the GN&C display functions, the PM function, and the backup G&N functions. The PM MDE's will contain backup G&N programs so that a "get me home" capability is available in the event of a generic software error or other critical system failures. Reload of the MDE memory for a change of functions will be provided by a tape read-only memory under control of the crew. Performance monitoring includes two primary functions: (1) Continuous limit/status checking of 300 analog and 300 discrete non- GN&C subsystem measurements with fault annunciation and PCM recorder control in the event of a malfunction: (2) Generate page format CRT display of related subsystem measurement sets at the flight crew's

discretion. «***, The limit/status check program is executed at a two/second rate and contains false alarm avoidance provisions. , No-go's are dis- played on an annunciator light matrix that identifies the problem area

i and on a CRT "scratch pad" line that identifies the particular page on j which the no-go parameter value can be observed. Growth provisions in- i elude consumables management, ground checkout usage, and redundant para- meter tracking. Emphasis is placed on keeping the processing simple _ DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N0.4 34? 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

;5u < o $s i§ <« 0^0

o u

O£ £ Z S 7 »- i ' o|g I1 O -TV

o•- • O

O 1 O O » •

o O- 13 < THE SINGER COMPANY DATE lQ/20/72 PAGE NO. 4_348 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

during the high vehicle subsystem change activity that will be encountered during the development phase. Performance Monitoring Software 1. Analog Processing - A performance monitor module shall be provided to verify that all non-GK&C subsystem analog parameters are within a predefined set of high/low limits. An out-of-tolerance condi- tion will cause notification to be made to the crew via subsystem annunciators, CRT display, or both annunciator and CRT. The current assumption is that 300 analog parameters will be processed by this routine. Each parameter will have three sets of high/low limits, on the average. One set of those limits will be active at a time. The control program will input an entire set of the selected PCM measurements at a fixed predetermined rate, as described earlier. The input data source is the OFI Master Controller. Upon completion of the input routine, the control program will dispatch the performance monitor tasks. After routine initialization, the analog measurements will be converted to engineering units, and in that form will be tested with respect to the active limits. Refer to the general program flow

' / shown in Figure 4.19.4-3. If no parameter is found out of tolerance, all parameters will quickly be processed and control passed back to the control program. If a parameter is found out of tolerance a test is! made to determine if it has been out of tolerance "n" consecutive times.

This test prevents noise from causing superfluous no-go indications. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-349

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

If the error count has not yet reached "n" for that parameter, it's errojr counter is incremented and processing of other parameters continues. If the error count had reached "n", the type of crew notification re- quired is interrogated. If an annunciator activation is specified, an 8-bit annunciator address code is placed on the control program output data list for transmission to the annunciator panel, at the end of the major processing cycle. . Measurements that are out of tolerance can be designated as "disregard for error notification" by crew. This capability is useful for stopping continuous error displays caused by invalid measurement readings. The disregard designation is made by requesting display of the format containing the erroneous measurement, and utilizing the line designator switch on the MDE assembly to identify the measurement. A "cancel disregard" designation is made in the same manner. If a CRT display is specified several actions occur. First, an indicator is set to identify the no-go condition as "high" or "low". The routine then sets up a message for line 17 of the current display, which specifies the format number associated with the faulty parameter. The message notifies the crew that an out of tolerance condition has been detected and will specify the page number on which the condition can be viewed. If the scratch pad (line 17) is currently j in use, the display will be delayed until the area is free and a dis- crete notification of the conflict will be issued to the MDE. Next, a one-line message is added to a queue of messages at the current time. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-350 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

k lii 8 * ? K v) O L* "si Vj ' k N Lx. *i

J s*r.

CO '

o-? l-l

• -* Q> .. 3 bO •H

© • ' ••"..-'• COUAjTf/S S #ese. r fa/L

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

These one-line messages are displayed when the crew requests the Performance Monitor Status page, and will reflect the 16 most recent c _ i out of tolerance conditions. Earlier malfunctions may be viewed by "paging" through the four-page Performance Monitor Status displays via a special keyboard command. Provision will be made to accommodate up to 64 of the one-line malfunction messages (4 pages x 16 measurements per page). If both panel and CRT crew notification action is specified for a particular parameter, both of the above described panel and CRT sequences occur. When a parameter that has previously been out of toleranc|e comes within tolerance, the converse of the above steps is performed. The annunciator is reset and/or the one line message in the Performance Monitoring Status format is purged and the remaining entries compressed. The crew notification scratch pad line message is removed is appropriate The above discussion described the comparison of the current parameter value to the active limits. The active limits are established by a separate module identified as the Performance Monitor ^ar. Phase Initializer. This module is called by the control program upon flight phase changes or as commanded by the crevy. Additionally, measure ment limit changes required for vehicle status change (e.g., engine firing) will be effected by monitoring discrete signals for the change in status. The Performance Monitor Phase Initializer will have 'tables i that associate the phase to the appropriate limits to use for each of

the parameters for that phase. The tables have been sized to accommo° date an average of three sets of high/low limits. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY - - - PAGE NO. 4-352 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

2. Discrete Processing - A Performance Monitor module shall be provided to verify the correct status of certain subsystem input discretes. Similar to the analog processing module, if a discrete is found to be in an incorrect state, the crew will be notified via panels, CRT or both panel and CRT. The current assumption is that 300 discrete parameters will be monitored at twice per second rate. The Discrete Performance Monitor module is briefly described. Refer to Figure 44-9i.4-4 for the general

program flow. The control program will perform all input and pass control to the discrete processing module. After module initialization, groups of 16 discretes will be tested to determine if any one of the 16 discretes has changed. If none have changed, other groups are tested until the scan is complete. If a discrete has changed, a table entry is interrogated to determine the type notification specified. Again, this can be via annunciators, CRT, or both. If annunciator notification is specified, ^s*-» an eight bit annunciator address code and an associated on/off bit are

queued for output. f .-...:..-.:...-;.. ._....— - ..--.-..- •• If CRT notification was specified, an "allow/disallow" table is interrogated to determine if the change was allowable. If so, no additional action is taken and the scan of other discretes continues. Presumably, the discrete for the current phase is not considered a part of the performance monitoring. If the discrete change is not allowed DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-353

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Output 1 Line Message

»j

Figure 4. 19.4-4 Discrete Processing Flow. .

2.10-43 SD 71-346 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-354 REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO;

and is currently In the incorrect state, the same sequence as was done in analog processing is performed. The "out of tolerance" indicator is set in the format skeleton on which the discrete appears, a notification is placed on the scratch pad line, and a one line summary message is in- serted in the Performance Monitoring Status format buffer. The use of

.this ;pre.s.e.ntat,ion ,is Jthe same as .described in the analog description. If the discrete change is to the correct state, the converse of the above sequence is performed. The initial discrete status and the control routines access to the proper "allow/disallow" and "should be" tables is estab- lished by the Performance Monitor Phase Initializer. This is the same routine mentioned earlier in the analog processing section. A set of allow/disallow and should-be tables are provided for each flight phase. Display Software - The display software performs the func- tion of organizing and presenting engineering unit subsystem data for CRT display. The^following paragraphs describe the display software subprograms, which are stored in the processor, and the display formats, -skeletons of which are resident in the MDE memory. - - —- -L 1. For Description - Subsystem status information is presented on the CRT in predefined logical groups. A single group or format is presented at a time. Each format consists of a title line, 1 to 16 measurement lines, and a scratch pad line. Each line may

contain up to 24 characters. The measurement lines each contain THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4.355 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

three fields; for sizing purposes a 12-character measurement description a 5-character measurement value, and a 4-character engineering unit label are assumed. The scratch pad line is used for the display of keyboard input data and messages from performance monitoring software. The format skeletons (exclusive of the actual parameter values) are stored in the MDE memory, and contain the alphabetic measurement name, engineer-

ing units (for example, "PSIA"), decimal points, display edit information, and Format Control Words (FCW's). The FCW's specify character genera- tion control information, x and y CRT position data, and mode control data. An "interface dictionary" (table of data) , which is resident in the display processor, is associated with each format. It contains data which describes and controls the processing unique to each measurement on a given format. The dictionary contains the

measurement number, conversion scale factors and biases, output codes, test limits, and certain flags and pointers. _ ...... The maximum MDE storage requirement for a 16-measurement *-=--. format is:

-:. 17 lines of 24 characters + carriage return 215 words x, y position and control words 4 words Format Control and-edit information ; 18 words Total 16-bit words for one format: 237 words DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. LO/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-356

REV. BINGHAMTCN. NEW YORK REP. NO.

The display processor storage requirement for the inter- face dictionary data associated with a 16 (analog) measurement format

is: Measurement designators, 16 x 12 characters 96 words Scale factors (1 # byte,+ Bias (2 bytes) 24 words Output codes (9 CRT, 3 annunciator) 2 words Test Limits, 3 sets at 1 word/set 48 words Total 16-bit words for one format: 170 words Total interface dictionary size for 35 formats: 5950 words 2. MDE Keyboard Processing - The MDE keyboard and line- select pushbuttons are used by the crew to select formats for display, and to specify flight measurements which are to be excluded from per- formance monitor error notification. Activation of the data entry- format select keys result in its display on line 18 of the CRT. The line-select keys are also stored, but not displayed. Activation of a specific key wilj^ result in a signal of the display processor, which responds, by reading the input buffer data and routing it to the proper processing program. Figure 4.1 19.4-5 describes the display processing ! -'.-'-' ... • .' flOW. : : 3. Display Update Processing - Display update processing consists of determining which format has been selected for display, assembling, and organizing the appropriate parameter values and status

flags, and scheduling data for output to the CRT and/or annunciator. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4.357 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

When the display format has been identified, the interface dictionary is searched to determine which of the parameters are to be displayed. The engineering unit values (previously stored by the performance monitor routines) are queued for output to the CRT by the output program. The status (go or no-go) of each parameter is inspected and if appropriate, .a one line .me.s.s.age is ^queued for transmittal and display on one of the four performance mointor status pages. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4^353 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

...A ..... _

. MTA :r

I

-, / foii,

TO CRT

Figure 'A . Display Processing Flow 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-359 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.19.4.4 Pavload (PLV System The PL system consists of two MDE processors dedicated to the status, control, checkout, initialization, and display of payload data. The PL computers which contain identical programs will both be active but only one will be in control. The PL system will not be re- quired to process onboard experiment data which will be either recorded onboard or transmitted to the ground for processing. Data transmission and recording will not require the PL computer participation. Memory growth capability for the PL computer system is provided by a dedicated read-only tape memory unit. DATE - THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK ' REP. NO.

4.19.5 Rationale Not applicable. 4.19.6 Assumptions "Index"and "Page Select" keys are on keyboard.

4.19.7 Data References 187 AP101/SP1 IBM OBC Candidates for Shuttle 232 MSC-03329 Space Shuttle Alternate Avionics System Study and Phase B Extension Final Report 12 November 1971 .. Pages 2.10-1 thru 2.10-48 2.5-16 thru 2.5-24 166 SD72-SH-50-3 Technical Proposal for Space Shuttle Program Volume III 12 May 1972 . Pages 3-95 thru 3-122 41 SD72-SH-0023 Space Shuttle-Phase B Avionics Final Report 8 March 1972 Pages 96 thru 103

CO en to THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 4_361 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.20 MAIN ENGINE CONTROLLER REF. When the Space Shuttle vehicle operation requires the 42 engine to start, operate at a given power level, or shut down, the vehicle sends a command to the engine. The con- troller is the electronic unit that receives these commands, determines the appropriate actions, and issues instructions to the engine controls. If the engine does not respond in a normal manner to these instructions, the controller modifies the instructions appropriately. If the engine parameters exceed predetermined limits and the limit control is enabled by the vehicle the engine is shut down by the controller.

Responsive control of the engine thrust level and mixture ratio is achieved by the controller updating the instructions to the engine controls fifty times a second (every 20 msec). ;The ^controller has the capability of interrupting the normal cycle for an update in less than 20 msec when the vehicle transmits a new command to the engine or acomponent failure warrants the interruption.

Precise engine performance is achieved through closed- loop control, a 16-bit computer word, 12 bit input-output resolution and self calibrating analog to digital conversion. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-362

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.20.1 CONTROLLER DESIGN REQUIREMENTS The controller is required to perform the following REF. 42 functions to implement the Avionics control, checkout and monitoring requirements.

1. Interface with the vehicle to receive engine commands and transmit data.

2. Interface with and provide signal conditioning, multiplexing and analog-to-digital conversion for 77 sensor signals and 93 analog built-in test signals. Also, provide pulse rate to digital conversion for 16 pulse sensor signals and 6 spark rate built-in-test signals.

3. Interface with and provide output electronics to cotmnand 5 proportional actuators (10 hydraulic servovalve torque motor coils and 22 solenoid coils), 13 pneumatic solenoid coils, and 6 spark igniters.

4. Process vehicle commands and engine performance data to provide closed-loop control at a rate of 50 times/ second (every 20 msec) for start, shutdown and mainstage t control.

5. Provide built-in test hardware and software pro- grams to validate the Avionics and engine system by conduct- ing automatic self tests every 20 msec, performing engine DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4.353 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. 8INGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. checkout on vehicle command, and performing engine limit 42 monitoring.

6. Control engine purges upon vehicle command, monitor engines readiness to start and provide an engine- ready signal to the vehicle.

7. Provide engine maintenance data to the vehicle data recording system.

8. Provide redundancy to meet electronic fail-operat- ional/fail-safe design requirements.

9. Provide electrical interfacing with redundant vehicle power buses and provide power switching, conversion, and distribution for the engine.

10. Provide connectors and circuitry for ground support equipment to alter and verify memory.

11. The controller is designed to operate without the use of external cold plates or cooling media.

The controller design requirements listed in Table A.20-1 are principal requirements imposed by Rocketdyne for the controller design, including those imposed by the engine CEI and ICD requirements. DATElO/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-364 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. TABLE 4.20-3! SUMMARY OF SSME CONTROLLER REQUIREMENTS 42

OESCRIPTiCN XEi'JI'.E-E.iT DESCRIPTION

O.M ANO ATIXf, PJ'ATlCN 0-500 SCCCK3S, f'l TO N?L STOXACE o-sC: SEc:i.:3. EPL T£«?E SUTURE -65 TO »I65 t UNLIMITED, ChECOJT AREA KUrtlOITY 100 PERCENT ACCELERATION 4.0 C OPERATIC.1* UCCTRICAL -170 TO »130 C HUMIDITY 100 PERCENT POVER DUAL 115/200 VAC. 3 PHASE PRESS'J?.E IS PS IA TO VACUUM 403 HZ, an v ?CA<. 550 VIB.RATIOH 70 G PEAK SINE, S03-3000 H2 W STEADY STATE -AXIf.Urt AT 31 G RMS RA.SCCH, COMPOSITE HO.MINAl VOLTAGE (I SIGMA LEVEL) INTERFACES VEHICLE - PE*. ICO RSS-3500-5 ACOUSTIC 17"! cb • " • CSE • AS P.EC.'JI'.ED TO ALTER •ACCELERATION i3.5 G MEC.ORY AS3 O'E.VkTE CW7ROLLEP. ADOITIOJiAL FRCM CROU'IO hEHTS SALT SPRAY SENSORS - 23 PRESSURE, IJ SA.MO AND OUST T£KPE?^TU^E. 6 FLOW, 8 SPEEO, 7 VIELATION MO 23 POSITION WEIGHT 81 IBS OUTPUT - 10 SERVO VALVE COILS, 35 SOLENOID-COILS AS'O 6 SPARK IGNITERS SAFETY FACTORS YIELD, l.t LIMIT DESIGN LOAD ULTIMATE, \.k LIMIT DESIGN DATA P'.C-CESSIVC LOAD PROOF, 1.2 LIMIT DESIGN SAMPLE P.ATE 20 MS PAJCR C*CI.E LOAD DATA RATE 10,000 SITS/SEC - ENGINE TO BURST. 1.5 LIMIT DESIGN VEHICLE LOAD 100,000 BITS/SEC -DEVELOP- MENT TESTIS3 FATIGUE FACTORS A (THEfLHAL CYCLES) ; :VTA T?.Vtsr£R RATE I .CCO.000 SITS/SEt 10 (MECHANICAL CYCLES) STORAGE iz.oio wc»5s. FULLY REPRO- C?^MA3LE WITH KEy.ORY PARTS PER 85M03528 LOCKOUT FAIL SA?£ C-SI'.'C FAIL OPERATIONAL - FIRST CORROSION RESISTANCE PROTECT FINISHES PER MSFC- FAILURE SPtC-250 FAIL SAFE - SECOSO FAILURE CCN.'iECTORS PER MSFC - DWG-WK39S69

lire JOO ENGINE STARTS TO NPL PER MIL-STD-li6l,

IDENTIFIC^TICS PER MIL-STO-130 KAIMTAI-V13ILITY NO SCHEDULED SERVICIS', SETVEEN RECYCLES-ACCESSASLE FCR ISTERCHA-.CEA3IL1TY PHYSICAL A.N9 FUNCTIONAL, COMPLETE, "• BUILT-IN-TEST ISOLATES FAULTS THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE N^365 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 4.20.2 CONTROLLER DESIGN DESCRIPTION 42 The controller is a single integral electronics package mounted directly on each of the three main engines. The controller electronics are housed in a pressurized aluminum case assembly specifically designed to provide thermal and vibration protection during ground and flight operation. The total package weight is 81 pounds (36.7 kilograms).

The functional relationship of the controller to the engine is illustrated in Figure 4.20-1. Engine performance data are received from engine sensors. Vehicle commands and requests for data are received from the vehicle/engine interface. Control decisions made by the digital computer on the basis of these inputs are issued to three types of engine controls, i.e., actuators, on-pff valves, and igniters. Information on operation of the actuators is fed back to^the controller. The controller transmits engine data to the vehicle through the vehicle/engine data bus

interface. :*...'..-•; :

The electronics within the controller are divided into five subsystems: 1. Input Electronics - Receives data from all in-

flight sensorsp converts .it to digital form and sends it THE SINGER COMPANY DATE lQ/20/72 PAGE NO.4-366 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

1 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY)

POWER BUS j

Figure 4.20-1 Engine Controller Functional Relationship DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO.4-367 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. to the computer interface electronics. Since the accuracy 42 of these electronic circuits contributes directly to con- troller accuracy, they are continuously monitored and re- calibrated by the computer.

"2. '"Computer"Interface 'Electronics - 'Controls the flow of all data within the controller.

3. Computer - Receives sensor data, vehicle commands, and vehicle data requests. It performs computations, issues engine control commands, and stores engine data until requested by vehicle. The computer also conducts tests of all control system components once very 20 msec. The computer includes a 12,288-word memory which stores the control and test programs and the engine performance data.

4. Output Electronics - Converts the computer digital control commands to voltages suitable for powering the engine igniters, on-pff controls, and actuators.

5. Power Supply Electronics - Converts the vehicle electrical power to the individual power supply voltages required by the Avionics system.

Detailed functional schematic diagrams of the elec- tronics are contained in Avionics (550K) Drawings Report, Volume 76. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE N0.4.36g 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. The controller design is straightforward for minimum 42 risk in development and operation. Low risk is achieved • through the use of proven technology, built-in flexibility, and conservative design. •«

The most significant single factor in reducing develop- ment risk is the adaptation of the Honeywell HDC-601 air- borne computer to the SSME application. The HDC-601 is completely developed, production released.

Much of the substance of the HDC-601 (Table 4.20-2) is directly .transferable to the controller application. . The remainder is straightforward adaptation with.minimal development risk. The HDC-601 has the required speed and accuracy, and is designed specifically for real-time control. The fflX>601 and its commercial counterparts, the DDP-516 and H-316 are presently fulfilling the requirements of numerous real time control applications. The H-316 uses the same logic as the HDC-601 but is packaged for commer- cial applications. The computer uses' a plated-wire.memory. The process of reading data from the memory does not dis- turb the contents of the memory; therefore, no additional time is required to restore the data in the memory as is the case with core types. Plated wire memories are more DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-369 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

TABLE 4.20-2 APPLICABILITY OF HONEYWELL HDC-601 TO SSME CONTROLLER

CHARJCTiRISTICS HlC-iOl CC."?:;TER SSM£ CONTROLLER

tcr.ic FULLY DEVELOPED AS HCC-601

WORD LENGTH 16 BIT __ SW'E AS HDC-601.

REAL-TIME CONTROL VIA PRIORITY INTERRUPTS SAC.E AS HOC-601

*£KO=IY ACCESS DIRECT AMD UNDER PP.Or.3AM CONTROL SAJ1E-AS HDC-60J

STANDARD SOFTVARE FU'.LY 5EVELOPED AND TIELD SA.1E AS H3C-60I CC-PATISLC VITH OOP-516 'C0"."£'?.-" CIAL CC

OPERATIONAL SOFTVARE _ SPECIAL FOR EACH KAY BE VERIFIED ON CCM-.ERCIAL DOP-516 PRIOR TO "APPClCATIOll "COIlTP.CLLER~AVArL"ABrcnY

KEMORY 5 MIL PLATt'O VIP.E SAKE AS HOC-fOI-WITH ? NIL PLATED WIRE FOR LOWER-FO'-fER AM GREATER SPEED

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS S«ALL ANO r£OIU-< SCALE BIPOLAR SAKE AS HPC-60I~PLGS~NASA X-RAY AND SERALIZATION AND OUALIr ICATICS TTL TO Mli-STC-833, LEVEL A

CIRCUIT PACWGING EDGE SUPPORTED P'.INTEO tflRINO -USES SAf.E CIRCUIT LAYOUT, BUT WITH "FO'WPACK" .'ARDS '.'ITK PLUn-lfi CONHECTOP.S KOUNTIlir, TO r.iil SSi:£ ESVIROfiKENTAL

CHASSIS WIRING WIRE-WRAPPED POINT-TO-POINT 5AI1E AS HDC-601- --- -

COMPONENT COOLING FORCED AIR CONVECTION 'OI.1ECT CONC'JCTICN TO CHASSIS VIA "FOAK PACK" THERMAL INSERTS .

CO o CO DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-370 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. environmentally resistant than core types and operate over 42 wider temperature ranges for any given speed. Vibration » ' resistance is superior since the plated wires are embedded in epoxy planes sandwiched with the electronics boards into a compact rigid package. The controller memory uses 2-mil wire which requires one-fifteenth the power of core memories, The 2-mil memory is operated with low-power electronics, minimizing the number of components and improving the reliability.

The majority of the input-output electronics circuits have been developed and proven on prior Honeywell systems.

Flexibility inherent in the controller design also reduces development risk by accommodating the changes and unforeseen contingencies,that arise in a normal development program.

Twenty percent spare connector pins and input/output electronics are included to provide for additional growth « , . in the quantities of sensors, actuators or solenoid valves. The spare electronics will be -wired into the controllers for development engines and those needed for the final design can be included in production controllers by adding duplicates of existing wiring board assemblies. Similarly, THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE N0.4.3n 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK •• REP. NO.

REF. added control functions can be accommodated since 30 percent 42 of the computational duty cycle is unused and 41 percent of the memory is uncommitted.

A major contributor to the flexibility of the controller -design i-s -^he^ese--of-

4.20.3 CONTROLLER INTERFACES :-. The main engine controller interfaces are listed in *=-. Table 4.20-3. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N0. 10/20/72 1IIATION PROnilCTS DIVISION *fJ/^

REV. BINGHW^TON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

TABLE 4.20-3 CONTROLLER INTERFACES

REF. 224 ;- Baseline • ". • ' • number of Spare Total ; ' . • Interface Interface llunber of Circuits Circuits Interface ' Interface • P.eouired rerruirec1 Circuit.".

V.ohlcle .Pouer .Bus 3 0 3 ^chicle/Engine Electrical Interface . a. Comnand Channels 3 0 ... 3 :. t. Recorder Channels 2 0 2 Pressure Sensors i a. External 28 G 3U '• b. Internal 2 . 0 2 ;• i Ternerature Sensor •' • . - ' '•..... • a. Hot Gas (50 ohms) H 2 . r. " b. LII2/LOX (5K ohms) 6 17 c. LH2/LOX. (1.38K ohns ) 1 5 C d. Controller Internal 3 0 3 ; Leal: Detection Sensors (Snace Provision Onlv) rio'.-7 S_ensors S " 2 10 fnecd Sensors 8 0 S Position Sensors a. Actuator 10 2 12 b. Servovalve/Bleed Valve 10 2 12

vibration Sensors ; a. Padial H 1 5 ! b. Longitudinal ' \ • 3 .1 H

f-nark Irniter , i a. Cormand *5=" 6 0 C b. Tonitor 6 0 C | On/Off Solenoid Coils | a. Pneumatic. 7 «.-••' 2 ' 9 1 b. Hydraulic 20 5 25

1 LL.IVO Valve 8 210 GSE Interface

» DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-373 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 4.20.3.1 VEHICLE/ENGINE ELECTRICAL INTERFACE 224 The vehicle to each engine controller interface will consist of eight individually twisted shielded pairs of wire. These wires will be divided into three command channels of two shielded pairs each and two recording channels of one shielded pair each. "Each command channel will consist of one pair for transmission of commands to the controller and one pair for transmission of data and command echoes to the vehicle. Each recorder channel will consist of one pair for transmission of recorder data to ;the vehicle. For redundancy, .the controller will have three connectors, one connector for each command channel with a recording channel in two of the connectors as defined in the ICD.

Vehicle to Controller Signal Characteristics Transmission Rate: 10° bits per second Code; Manchester Bi-Phase (Level) Square Wave Coupling: Transformer Isolation Characteristic Impedance: 150 ohms +"10 percent Input Impedance: Characteristic impedance Input Voltage Impedance: Greater than 5 volts p-p Signal Rise time: Less than 250 Nano-seconds Signal Fall time: Less than 250 Nano«seconds DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-374 10/20/ 12 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK ' REP. NO.

REF. Vehicle to Controller Signal Characteristics (cont'd.) 224 Signal Overshoot: Less than 20 percent Signal Undershoot Less than 20 percent Skew: Less than 32 microseconds between any two channels

Controller__to. Vehicle Signal Characteristics Transmission Rate; 10 bits per second Code: Manchester Bi-Phase (Level) Square Wave Coupling: Transformer Isolation Characteristic Impedance: 150 ohms + 10 percent Driving Capability: Minimum of 250 feet Output Voltage Amplitude: Greater than 5 volts p-p at receiving end Signal Rise time: Less than 250 nano-seconds Signal Fall tiine: Less than 250 nano-seconds Signal Overshoot: Less than 20 percent Signal Undershoot: Less than 20 percent Signal Droop: Less than.20 percent Skew: Less than 32 microseconds between any two channels DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-375

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Channel Clock. The clock for each command channel 224 will be derived from the respective command channel infor- mation. The clock for each engine status data and command echoes channel to the vehicle will be derived from the con- troller internal clock. The clock for each recorder channel will be derived from the controller internal clock.

Word Sync. The word sync pulse, for both command and recorder channels, will be designated by two consecutive 360 degree pulses. Each pulse will be one-bit time in duration. The polarity of the first pulse will be equal to the first 180 degrees of a logical "1" state. The polarity of the second pulse will be inverted from the polarity of the first pulse.

Command Word. Command words from the vehicle .will consist of 15 bits plus a parity bit per word. The relation- ship between the word sync pulse, command information, and parity bit is shown in Figure 4.20-2. Valid commands are listed in Table 4.20-4. Command code"format is shown in

Table 4.20-5. ' • ._ _ , '•• •

Commands from the vehicle will consist of two basic types of commands. These are defined as absolute commands (i.e., start, shutdown, automatic checkout, etc.) and vari- able commands (i.e., thrust and mixture ratio). DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-376

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 224

CODE 0 I 0 I 0 I I I 0 I I I 0 I 0 I I 0 I 0 | I I I 0

LOGIC "O1

—WORD SYNC uSEC PARITY- BIT ." I-MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT 15 BIT COMMAND/DATA WORD

NOTE: MANCHESTER BI-PHASElEVa "ONE" IS REPRESENTED BY AID "ZERO IS REPRESENTED BY A 01

Figure 4.20-2 Command/Status, Echo and Recorder Word DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-377 IMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

• REF. 224 „ o

fa , t •- - " • ' - . - . - . .-•- . . .. 0. W i •' EH 2 H s •• - a- '.-.'• to wi o S - ' «3? ^" rt i Q CD KCDH2K D COM W H C^ 2 < £- S CO 2 H 0) 2 2 ftit£2 M o H W 5: ^ i p, fej^r"?5 ^ WOOC.O Hl-1 a ^ CD C£ CM W to *3 fa W E-< W OS E-H O EH 0. D .-1 CD fa > S ' H D 3 to rc (u fa _j £{ «J tf -.— K? O ^ ' 8-8 -Sf * S .W>tO*-tM WW ~~* r- fM tC K «- J tO p 5 S 3 g g W iJ EH W < 1? f^4 rt! * W Er- CQ w t~< fc-« £-* CQ Ci-< rt! E**^-) EH < in S W S *^* *^* *^< ki IS rtj | ^ o

I W S § g g g g ; o u 2 2 s: ^ ^S"*tS%BBsCIT— - CM U W W O O M [14 U *~" til • ^C >*< i t } ^J wo o u o / =s O ^ »-' O W W W (t) ;1 " . / CsJ 2 CO CO •^ w) Q • o ' •/ V3 «£ w w o c* . a o o ta s to to H W W W W \ / H CO 10 (0 tO H • O ffi E - - i o p^ Qj S W U [i] bj f | ' ' i O CD CD CD ' i. CD IX .' : • i ' EH « ft a: u. s~*\ DP C3 D 3 S X (^"O ft. dt fx^ cu pu t^oH i NMOQXnHS-ISOd X

NMoaLnHS •' - • • aovjiSNiw .- • •LHViS (R) r NOiJivavdsrHd J,HYXS © 00 0 t

.. ^ inoxoaHD x) X f \^ J/ -i THE SINGER COMPANY DAT PAGE NO. A_37o fo/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVIS ION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

. - - - t .. w -_ . W I CM o O z JSJ CM (f. PS M M M* O IM D . H O 0 M • OS. 04 H Z HZ Q W CM [m M • 2 W M W O CO W H •4 z H 2 2 CO od Z rtj o ^•3 O MO WWW M W W M w ^ U4 Q O H W w co (H W H H Z OS <. *£. CO < U rij 'O *f. OS 4 W »£ D C3 M W w Z K W W (j M a D M OS M o o4 Q »J M M CU H W W H M H H D H OS W U CO CD eC »4 < M HM rt 2 2 u. W ft< Z w Z M W M OS M •i W Q *£. •• ,3; V H B W 03 M W D O CO H Z tf. *W .CD- - . :Q gj -H K -OS 2 OS '< z «d « Q s** M* z z H OS OS CO W W 2 W D CO M ii ' O W o D U W D H H H M W M" W US *£ T3 M M EG H H OS X In H >4 OS i-3 H 0 U "V »C >H H CO Z W re OS 0 o CO CO *; W 0) O M 2 H 2M ** Wo; os u; w z cJ Oj D W W t-J £> Z W S O Z H <£ O k4 X Ou 2 O r _ D Z H O w W Z OS Z' z z »~l l l CM H &4 M O M" z Z M H H CQ H H £H Z 0- Q w 04 *£ M OS Q § 2 W . K Z D M z 2 W 2 2 W Z o O X Z O W Z O 33 Z 04 D ' H 1 M os '-o •to M H

04

ao M S o o sf I O Q tsj Z

O 3 o «

X DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N0 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION '4*379

REV. - - --; - Q.M^iMTfYU NFW VOW. RFP. NO. - ' . • • " - . • • o2 o '•• - s2 H 2 a o ^ • HM w a w• M H f-l {•« • 0 rt W D 2 OS S 33 . O W 3 W . • oft. o a "• f W O tl W Ci CM . .... a J CM tJ 2 - w O H « ^ Q ' "" 2 H Q W M v E-" 2 . W M 2 S X ' O. M 2 rtl (MO w ocuw w w s >-' H 1-333 U, Q 3333 M 33 >« : ..-*?O . H£-«O O O W t/3 W fQ Q > •H O O CO CO K CO 25 O , W2 O«H W WW WW O2 WWW

J^ W Q X1 . f . . i -.,- ..•'. •;:•;';,• ,...-. . .-•.-.•• {£ 33 w M . s •.-.<>.& -a .v ' ."•'-••'.;,•••. ..- ;. W '..;• " ';••:•{.- .••••'.-'. •>:'•'••: •'''; '.' '• ;:: . \ : rt S W S ... - ' »J " • ' •"'•''.-• " ' p4 O P£ ... ^ ' - - - . •.. . • . . H o q o '.'"•• •'••"••' W. >'.•' :' '..' -."•- ' • ' ' •' •- ' ' ' , _ ft| rt, 2 ...... • ^ •..'•.'. £-1 " ' ' . i K H* m w ri www rt W W H Pi H H Oi > tsi H - S . M £•« . s D • Qi O W2 I • g i g Q . W M W H rtj rtj N X W H ^4 Q 2: S H M O > W W US 2 a 2 WO »-) 2 .3. H 0 0 2i < > M 05 < M K i o< u o :• '^ ij x w > o, w si i-l < O 2 H W .H ° 022 2 W W > CJ tJ W W . o w w O ft<> BJOOW as sc fc?_*> . • *S*•*L« *XT*» *•"+1+• 0 O^PiWCQQiW WS CJ ** »; S Oi J 1 1 (tj ci ^_j 0 33 33 Q2(MOP«cs32O ft* &> •?. »-3S22»-JD5H- i-3O D • ^j 1 1. 1 W«MMWMO2 WM Oi DW<.

.

J.HV01S " •' ' • ' '• . - ' 1w ^%vJ JL LU 'Z ct * cLtti ti QI uj u \c ui o X

CO y ^ ^\ \T ^s ^T TT ^\ CO XXXXXX XX X 2J f 1 ~ u. f DATE1 Q/20 772 THE SINGER COMPANY NO. .o« xw '' siMiiiATinN pRnniin-c; m VISIO N PAGE HA ->on u

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK ' REP. NO. I ' . 8 I • . .. • > w •-.- . 1). H! OS .-•.-. : - . . ' • • J , • f <" W • . •'••'-• t- > H W t o • o ' ' g ••' • .•-.-•-. n H C5 W CM H WHO a. f: w |: s*^ ffio x «t^: t D W PS EH . 2 t - W EH 2 rt W . M 1) 2 D W P« . - p ' 0 *** ^-* • ' • . 2 D S2 p^| ^J . Jj. ff | |«f H i; O o w o o o II M •: . • as 2 • <-s 2 W r EH rHDO ' 'SEH "*EoH -W • ' ; •o x H f 2 O EH O O EH W O 1. O »x 25 y* t^ 2 2 f fci o w o o w c y W 1 . W 2 W W Pi 0 H Ir 03 O 33 E Pi " O K IH- 1- 1 OO< OOD ^ W ff] I ••-.•••.•••••- s o li wo w w CO a »• W U WWW Q t, ^T^. l» H • EH H H 2j o p* 1- . «< O *C cC W -+ t1 H 2 H H W . : S EH D r- EH H EH H D . OL ; M PS • M H Of 2 P . 2 2 W o^5 ^.8x W py r ; •'..- HO M H U. ; Sn Uw Q >+ • *• . • ' ••'"'• .. • •• . ' '..."" W »-5 -, •.•-•»•- . - . ; •-••._• M * O P« < i-j w - ' . •. • '"• •'••''•' ^ s W S . w . < > . .. .- . w o •• cc w > > .15 - •o g <" i >-t < W W iJ > . ' "'•'..•'..'••

M W W W; p> V? cs a ij . M M HI<:DEHO i»j ^5 o a. OPS OH PC ™ ^* z«. • ' PS H Q ^ O 2 H W • s s 2 O W W W U O *" w y «y* Q oo»-^ ww ^ • H 0 0 2 U « « 2 U a, o u HfciW?2O2 M . '• < O rc ac ^i CO f*4 C^ H > 7 tO PS CO • H 0 ^V fl. CO • ^^ PS f^ CD • CO ^S ^ y*^ iJtHHH PS ' W PS EH I i » C^ ft} ^4 2^ ^3 Q f]j ^^ j^* j^ x->. 2 D M O • & Z S W PJ H x 1 X 1 C5 tn i-^U rax* W W WCO NMOOLfiHs-,LSOd •• • • _ • -.x

NMOaiQHS . X 1

39VISNIVW X

IHVIS . • x - • •

X ' i NOI»LVHVd3Hd. iHViS .

MOH03HO XXX X XXXX DATElO/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N0. 4.38! SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

' W : : o ..'a' •.'-.-' ' - : :'::.•:• k! w .. w K . 2 H W f£ ff\ • . - £•• ?C - 1*4 - 2 0 33 H .• . a M W ' w ... H ' H W O 2 U 1»4 2 W 2 V M ^ in x-s W C9 • M 2 O .^ w '"'*O *O W * H >J H - -H E-i . D to to o ; O CM MM ^ i CH w ' Q a OS to i O ' Q J fri Si ."8. . ' "'B : 3 i o Sf to w S ' • J*S C£ « • 2 . • 2 0 SB s s u f^Hi t-^3r 2 * • § • W 0 0 . f--* S u3 2 0 U I*™^ fv. U W o o 0 0 ' """"— § : £• < 2 -"-.'". W (0 (O O ' CL M M H H EH H . ' H H H W W W Q Q 03 0) CQ >4 t-3 M H M H CQ CQ CQ 3 H 2 2 rn EC K < <; <: S S 222222 2 S Q H H H W W W § 1 O O 2 W> s£ U O r- 01 «n t- . M

i • NMOCLLnHS X X X X XX

•' aOYlS.v.TVM X X X 'X X X

i^ViS X X X X X X

fHVd3Hd iHYiS X X X X X X

X X X X XX DATE10/20/72 THE SI NGER COMPANY PAGE N0 t A. 300 SIMULATION pRnnurrq DIVISION • **-Jo/

REV. BINGHAf/ITON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 225 TABLE A. 20 -5 VEHICLE /ENGINE COMMAND CODE FORMAT j BINARY CODE OCTAL CODE . COMMAND i 0"0 000 010 001 111 217 AUTOMATIC CHECKOUT 000 000 010 000 001 201 PURGE SEQUENCE NO . 1 1 i 000 000 010 000 010 • 202 PURGE SEQUENCE NO. 2 1 000 000 010 000 Oil 203 PURGE SEQUENCE NO. 3 • 000 000 010 000 100 204 PURGE SEQUENCE NO. 4 '. 0.00 000 010 001 000 210 START 1 000 000 010 000 101 205 SHUTDOra ! 000 000 001 000 000 100 THRUST LEVEL ^ to to 000 000 001 111 Oil . 173 000 000 000 000 001 001 MIXTURE RATIO ^ to to COO COO 000 010 110 . 026 000 000 Oil 000 010 302 COMMAND EXECUTE 000 000 010- 000 110 206 LIMIT CONTROL INHIBIT 000 000 010 000 111 207 ° LIMIT CONTROL ENABLE • . . • 000 000 010 001 001 211 ABORT TURNAROUND PURGE SEQUENCE NO. 1 000 000 010 001 010 •212 ABORT TURNAROUND PURGE SEQUENCE NO. 2 000 000 010 001 Oil 213 OXIDIZER DUMP 000 000 010 001 100 214 FUEL DUMP 000 000 OJO 001 101 215 - TERMINATE PROPELLANT DUMP 000 000 010 010 000 220 MAIN FUEL VALVE 000 000 010 010 001 221 MAIN OXIDIZER VALVE 000 000 010 010 010 222 FUEL PRT.BURNF.R OXIDIZER VALVE 000 000 010 010 Oil 223 OXIDIZER PRE BURNER OXIDIZER VALVE 000 000 010 010 100 224 COOLANT CONTROL VALVE 000 000 010 001 110 216 . CONTROLLER RESET 000 000 010 Oil 100 234 ' ' FUEL F1.0WMI-TER SPIN TEST 000 000 010 Oil 101 235 : OXIDtZER FLOWMRTHR SPIN TEST 000 000 010 Oil 110 236 SEQUENCE CHECK 000 000 010 010 101 225 C.N2 SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE 000 000 010 010 110 : 226 HJI-L SYSTEM PlWr.L: CONTROL VALVE THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-383 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

TABLE 4.20-5 VEHICLE/ENGINE COMMAND CODE FORMAT (cont'd.)

BINARY CODE OCTAL CODE

000 000 010 010 111 227 LIFTOFF. SEAL AND BLEED VALVE CONTROL VAI.VF. 000 000 010 Oil 000 230 HPOT INTERMEDIATE SEAL PURGE ANT) FLOKMETER BRAKES CONTROL VALVE ' 000 000 010 Oil 001 231 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN CONTROL VALVE 000 ~000 trro-on-'Oio "232 "SENSOR-CHECKOUT 000 000 010 Oil Oil 233 . SPARK IGNITER CHECKOUT 000 000 011 000 100 3.04 STATUS REQUEST 000 000 010 111 001 271 COMMAND'CHANNEL 1 INHIBIT 000 000 010 111 010 272 COMMAND CHANNEL 2 INHIBIT 000 000 010 111 100 274 COMMAXD CHANNEL 3 INHIBIT 000 000 010 110 001 261 • Cat-UNO CHANNEL 1 ENABLE 000 000 010 110 010 262 COMMAND CHANNEL 2 ENABLE ' ooo poo 010 110 100 264 COMMAND .CHANNEL 3 ENABLE 000 000 011-111 111 377 • MESSAGE REJECT

NOTES: ' . •• • .."•.'•••'. '.-' ' ' ' '•.•••'•.-• - ; 1. Commands Thrust Level between 50 and.109 percent NPL in one percent increments.

2. Commands Mixture Ratio between 5.5 and 6.5 in 0.05 unit increments. <• 3. Codo transmitted to vehicle from engine if voted command is determined invalid. DAI!)/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4.334 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Absolute commands will agree exactly in content for 224 all operable command channels. Voting with 3 good channels, 2 of 3 agreement will constitute a good vote. After first channel failure, 2 out of 2 agreement will constitute a good vote.

The variable command which is executed, assuming that all 3 channels are good, will be the average of all 3 vari- able commands after it has been determined that all three are within a TBD percentage difference of each other. After the first channel failure, an average of 2 variables will be made to a variable TBD percentage difference. Command values which are outside this limit will be disregarded.

The interval between successive commands from the vehicle to the controller will be a minimum of 2 milliseconds. The number of commands from the vehicle to the controller will not exceed 3 commands for a 20 millisecond period.

Command Echoes to Vehicle. Commands from the vehicle will be echoed twice by the controller. Commands will be echoed immediately, upon receipt of a command, on each individual command channel exactly as received from the vehicle. Concurrent with the individual channel echo and commensurable with the allowable skew between command chan- nels, the controller will initiate voting of commands from DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-38 5* SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. all operable command channels. A validated command will 224 result in the transmission of the voted command to the vehicle to indicate message acceptance by the controller. Conversely, a command which is voted and determined to be invalid by the controller due to disagreement or incorrect phase of engine operation, will result in the transmission of a "message reject" code to the vehicle indicating the command has been rejected. The transmission of either the voted command or message reject code will occur within 400 microseconds of receiving absolute type command words from all operable, channels. The transmission of either the - voted command or message reject code will occur within 600 microseconds of receiving variable type command words /; from all operable channels. All command word echoes will be transmitted on all command channels. The design of the controller will be such that, if in the future the command echo requirement is removed, the controller operation would not be degraded.

Execut.e c: promand. All commands from the vehicle, except the "status request" command, will be implemented with a "command execute" comsaand. The command execute will be received from the vehicle within 200 microseconds following the transmission of the voted command from the controller. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 4.385 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. The controller will implement the most recent command which 224 has been received and accepted prior to the command execute. B Implementation will be concurrent with the transmission to the vehicle which indicates acceptance of the command execute,

Status Data to Vehicle. The parameters listed in Table 4.20-6 Engine Status Transmitted to Vehicle, will be transmitted to the vehicle from the controller Via the command channels in response to a "status request" command word. A command execute word is not required to initiate the transmission. The transmission of the parameters will be initiated immediately following the transmission of the voted status request echo. The format of the engine status data will be as shown in Figure 4.20-2 and Table 4.20-7 and will be transmitted on all command channels.

Word 4 of Tables v.20-6 and 4.20-9 is a failure iden- tification of the items listed in Table 4.20-8 Failure Identification. Word 5 is an identifying test number associ ated with word 4 and shall include information concerning the number of failures experienced. This will not be limited to failures which cause redundancy switching but all detectable failures. Word 6 of Tables 4.20-6 and 4.20-9 is a parameter value associated with information contained in words 4 and 5. Tha data interval listed in DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-387

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 224

TABLE 4.20-6 ENGINE STATUS TRANSMITTED TO VEHICLE

DATA DATA SCALED PRECISION WORD RANGE OF DATA

ENGINE STATUS ' 1 MIXTURE RATIO 2 0-8 THRUST 3 0-520K ±6K Ibs. FAILURE IDENTIFICATION « TEST NUMBER OF DATA WORD NO. U 5 PARAMETER VALUE OF DATA WORD NO. 4 6

, .NOTES:

• 1. THIS DATA PROVIDED TO VEHICLE VIA COMMAND CHANNELS IN RESPONSE i TO A STATUS REQUEST COMMAND. -««*ss^ ' i 2. THESE 6 WORDS SHALL BE'OBTAINED FROM SAME DATA TABLE AS FIRST 8 WORCS OF TABLE X. . . <• • <

3. THRUST AND MIXTURE RATIO VALUES ARE 15 BIT WORDS.

< CO I- CO CO DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. A-388

REV. - BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 225 TABLE 4.20-7 ENGINE STATUS WORD

I»RO FORMAT 7 BITS ) BITS I. BITS J BITSI WORD EQUALS 15 BITS EXCLUDING PARITY BIT -

I— DEFINES ENGINS SELF-TEST STATUS LDEFINES OPERATING MODE WITHIN PHASE -' L__tCFINES PHASE IN EFFECT ' ' ••• ' " - .' ••' " ' : ——Mi ZEROS '''••'.•''' ... , "i " 1 BYTE COPE 1 ; PHASE (3 BITS* ' SELF TEST STATUS (LAST 3 BITS)

BIT CODE PHASE HAME BIT CODE . ENGINE STATUS :

1 COO (HOT USEO) 00 (HOT USED) ' : ' | 001 CJO'JJO CHECKOUT . 01 ENGINE OK j ...J 010 START PREPARATION 10 • COMPONENT FAILED I Oil START 11 CNGIHE LIMIT EXCEEDED 100 KXIKSTACZ 101 SBUTOOWM : • : 110 COST SHUTDOtM ' ill . (SPARE) r

I : tOOt BY PHASE (J BITS) ' .

; PKASE *• GROUND START START HAINSTACX SHUTDOWN POST- BIT COSE CKECKO'JT PREPARATION SHUTDOWN

000

001 STANDBY PURGE START NOR.'

010 AUTOMATIC PURSE CLOSED LOOP THRlJST KPL TO OXIDIZED ! • CHECKOUT SEQUENCE NO. J THRUST CONTROL LIM [TING ZERO THRUST DUSP ' I '.'. °H- CHECKOUT PURGE THRUST . FAII- SAFE . PROPELLANT FUEL I COMPLETE SEQUENCE !*>. 3 LIMITING ACTtJATOR VALVES' CLOSED DUMP ' LOOCUP • " ! i 100 COMPONENT PURGE FAIL SAFE (SPJIRE) FAIL SAFE ABORT TURNAROUND CHECKOUT SEQUENCE KO. 4 ACTUATOR LOCKUP PNEUMATIC SEQUENCE NO. 1

101 SEQUENCE ^- *• ENGINE READY (SPARE) (SP>kRE) (SPARZ) ABORT TURNAROUND CHECK SEQUENCE NO. 2

• - --i . 110 (SPARE) (SPARE) ' (SPARE) (SP^IRE) (SPARE) ENGINE READY

...; ui (SPARE) (SPARE) (PPA*£) (SPJ*E) " (SPARE) (SPARE) j • 1 • " ' • ' 1 i EXAMPLE OF WORD CODE ASO INTERPRETATION - "••' ''•'•'• ' I

; |ooo '"I.-- ; ' STATUS! ENGINE .OK

^^^••••rtJW••^^•unn?i Ii KUIdAAwnQM&T* VwrTonwTDOi MJif*

PHASE I KAINSTAGZ DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. LO/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-389

REV. B1NGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 224 TABLE 4.20-8 FAILURE IDENTIFICATION

1. Controller Channel 1 2. Controller Channel 2 . 3. GN2 Purge Control Valve ' 'U. -Fuel-System -Purge 'Control Valve • . 5. Emergency Shutdown Control Valve channel 1 6. Emergency shutdown control Valve Channel 2 7. Invalid Vehicle Command ' 8. Liftoff Seal and Bleed Valve control Valve 9. Pressure Actuated Fuel Bleed Valve 10. Pressure Actuated Oxidizer Bleed Valve 11. High Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Intermediate Seal Purge and Flownieter Brakes Control Valve Channel 1 12. High Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Intermediate Seal Purge and Flowmeter Brakes Control Valve Channel 2 13. Oxidizer System Purge Pressure sensor * 14. Fuel System Purge Pressure Sensor . 15. Fuel Liftoff, Seal and Bleed Valve control Pressure sensor 16. Oxidizer Bleed Valve Control Pressure Sensor 17. High Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Intermediate Seal Purge and " Flowmeter Brakes Pressure Sensor Channel* 1 18. High Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Intermediate Seal Purge and Flowmeter Brakes Pressure Sensor channel 2. 19. Fuel Preburner Igniter Channel 1 20. Fuel Preburner Igniter Channel 2 21. Oxidizer Preburner Igniter Channel 1 , . 22« Oxidizer Preburner Igniter Channel 2 • DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-390 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 224 TABLE 4.20-8 FAILURE IDENTIFICATION (cont'd.)

23. Main Combustion Chamber Igniter Channel 1 21. Main combustion Chamber Igniter Channel 2 25. Main Fuel Valve Actuator Channel 1 - - ' " 26. Main Fuel Valve Actuator Channel 2 - . 27. Main Oxidizer Valve Actuator Channel.1 28. Main Oxidizer Valve Actuator Channel 2 29. Main Combustion Chamber Coolant Valve Actuator Channel 1 30. Main Combustion Chamber Coolant Valve Actuator Channel 2 31. Fuel Preburner Oxidizer Valve Actuator Channel 1 32o Fuel Preburner Oxidizer Valve Actuator Channel 2 33. " Oxidizer Preburner Oxidizer Valve Actuator Channel 1 34. Oxidizer Preburner Oxidizer Valve Actuator Channel 2 35. -Spare . ' / ;'; ' ' . 36. Spare ... 37. Spare . ' ' •• • •.'.'' 38. Spare ^ ' . . . 39. Spare HO. Spare '. - ' . -^ .••'••• -:- : ••-. \ '.-.'. U1. - Spare U2. Spare ' '.' H3. Low-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Discharge Pressure Sensor No. 1 Channel 1 _-...-. UU. Low-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Discharge Pressure Sensor No. 1 Channel 2 ' . . THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE N 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION °' 4-391.

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF 224* TABLE 4.20-8 FAILURE IDENTIFICATION (cent1d.)

45. Low-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Discharge Pressure Sensor No. 2 Channel 1 .... - .. . . 46. Low-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Discharge Temperature Sensor No. 1 Channel 1 . • 47. Low-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Discharge Temperature Sensor No. 1 Channel 2 . 48. Low-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Discharge Temperature Sensor No. 2 Channel 1 ...... • . ' : . 49. Low-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Shaft Speed Sensor

50. High Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Turbine Seal Purge Pressure Sensor ' ...... 51. Low-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Radial Vibration Sensor

52- .Fuel Flowrate Sensor No. 1 Channel 1 ...

53. Fuel Flowrate Sensor No. 1 Channel 2 . :

54. Fuel Flowrate Sensor No. 2 Channel 1 .-.-'.

55. Spare • ' ; :'.••';"•. ; 56. Fuel Preburner Temperature Sensor.NO. 1

57. Fuel Preburner Temperature Sensor No.""ii=:=^

58. Fuel Preburner Chamber Pressure Sensor ; 59. High-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Discharge Pressure Sensor

' * • • 60. Spare 61. High-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Shaft Speed Sensor Channel 1 ,* ~ • 62. High-Pressure Fuel Turbopump .Shaft Speed Sensor Channel 2 63. High-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Radial Vibration Sensor 64. Full Preburner Longitudinal Vibration Sensor DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4.392 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

224 TABLE 4.20-8 FAILURE IDENTIFICATION (cont'd.)

65. Low-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Discharge Pressure Sensor-' Channel 1 ' - ' i 66. Low-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Discharge Pressure Sensor Channel 2 ' ,67. -Low-P'ressure Oxidizer Turbopump Shaft Speed Sensor

68. Spare ' • ",'.' 69. Low-Pressure Oxidizer Radial Vibration Sensor 70. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Discharge Pressure Sensor No. 1 Channel 1 ' . • : . . . 71. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Discharge Pressure Sensor No. 1 Channel 2 - '...".- • 72. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Discharge Pressure Sensor No. 2 Channel 1 . . . . ' . 73. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Discharge Temperature Sensor No. 1 Channel 1 . ; 1H. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Discharge Temperature Sensor No. 1 Channel 2 75. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Discharge Temperature Sensor No. 2 Channel 1 76. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Shaft Speed Channel 1 77. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Shaft Speed Channel 2 78. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Boost Stage Discharge Pressure Sensor ^ 79. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Radial Vibration Sensor 80. Oxidizer Preburner Temperature Sensor No. 1 -- 81. Oxidizer Preburner Temperature Sensor No. 2 82. Oxidizer Preburner chamber Pressure Sensor 83. Oxidizer Preburner Longitudinal Vibration Sensor ' . DAT THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO.4.393 IO/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 224 TABLE 4.20-8 FAILURE IDENTIFICATION (cont'd.)

- . . . . tf 8tt. Oxidizer Flowrate Sensor No. 1 Channel 1 85. Oxidizer Flowrate Sensor No. 1 Channel 2 86. Oxidizer Flowrate sensor No. 2 Channel 1 87. Spare ' , . . •'. . : .; ; 88. Oxidizer Tank Pressurant Pressure Sensor Channel 1 89. Oxidizer Tank Pressurant Pressure Sensor Channel 2 90« Main Combustion Chamber Fuel Injection Pressure Sensor 91. Main Combustion Chamber Pressure sensor No. 1 Channel 1 92. Main combustion Chamber Pressure Sensor No. 1 Channel 2 93. Main Combustion Chamber Pressure Sensor No. 2 Channel 1 94.-c Main Combustion Chamber Coolant Temperature Sensor 95. Main Combustion Chamber Coolant Pressure Sensor 96. Main Combustion Chamber Longitudinal Vibration Sensor 97. Hydraulic System Pressure Sensor Channel 1 98. Hydraulic System Pressure Sensor Channel 2 99. Controller Internal Temperature Sensor Channel 1 100. controller Internal Temperature Sensor Channel 2 101. Controller Internal Pressure Sensor Channel 1 " M 102. Controller Internal Pressure Sensor Channel 2

103. Vehicle/Engine Command Channel 1 - 104. Vehicle/Engine Command Channel 2 . 105. Vehicle/Engine command Channel 3 106. Spare ;•.•--• 107. Oxidizer Inlet Pressure Not Ready DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-394

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 224 TABLE 4.20-8 FAILURE IDENTIFICATION (cont'd.)

108. Oxidizer Inlet Temperature Not Ready 109. Fuel Inlet Pressure Not Ready • : "110. Fuel Inlet Temperature Not Ready 111. Hydraulic System Pressure Out of Limits . ' 112. Vehicle/Engine Recorder Channel 1 -. - . 113. Vehicle/Engine Recorder Channel 2 ..-. 114. Vehicle 400 Hz Power Bus No. 1

115. Vehicle 4-00 Hz Power Bus No. 2 '; j: . :: ';.'''''-.'•. 116. .Spare •• • ' \ ..:-'.- •.•.;.'';.':'.;/•' '• ' ;•'•' .'.-'. 117. Fuel Preburner Temperature Out of Limits 118. Oxidizer Preburner Temperature Out of Limits 119. High-Pressure Fuel Turbopump Shaft Speed Out of Limits 120. High-Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Shaft Speed Out of Limits

121. Main Combustion Chamber Pressure Out of Limits

122. Oxidizer Heat Exchanger Pressure Drop Out of Limits

123. High Pressure Oxidizer Turbopump Intermediate Seal Purge ••; and Flowroeter Brakes Pressure Out of Limits ; • . " • * ' \ 124. and greater are Spares \'• . •"•""". l . ' - \ • NOTE: Channel Includes Sensor, Harness, Connectors and Controller Input or Output Electronics. THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO, 4-395 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

CO 2 I

o o o o o o ooooo oooooo o o OO OOOOOO EH (X »-srcNcja'«-

W

W m (A I • • x . • • X • • X • • t 0< CO CO W > CO to to > co CO W > CO CO CO > CO CO to ; W O A » • 2 • . « 2 • • 2 • » CO Ctj Eb UU Uc fa fa M fa CM CM O.O pa VO CN tN r- o «- CS r- O (N CN CM T- o

w fas a ^O O< QJ I O OS CO O H PS to H 2 CO H m n iX to 2 H M t- o CO S CO HAS CO o o o tno o- O CT» o O o o ty>o o o O C o o »o o o O O O O 4-* O »OOOO O C 8 a w U"» U" w a s •4 Z I I I I I I i «n i i i i i i i i i i l I O I I | I I I I C 0.0 o ;» O o o ooooo o o o O f*"j O O O O O O O C o « B CO

O>4 m o">

t O CN M CO OS CO D P W K D D CU CO PS OS y.- • H CO PU O CO fa p to O H P< CO CQ (O H w W CQ OS as < (Q p cw H o fa CQ u CQ EH H M M ~ s a< j < PS O rt S W O CQ O W OS OS K P Cb 33 W P H P W £- H W w w W W EH ft. O H fa D s Z p a o IX OS (4 O >J CO w o M CO o W Q to o to w to H & M tO ex. O to H H to H tO 0- H H z z a fa D W 2 X w e-i w s a H fa fa PS W PS C Cti OS O < os ^ p < u CO O H O D M Z W W«HC< -. W W Z Z W " " W B f W to «=C W M .J (X U, Ji; § Q s a a 3 to Pi os os co to " ' m o s. to IE W to o w ,< >-J w oo 0 tO M O' t'J -' COtOQiCUMMM n^ H x x x

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. w

O O OOOO OOOOO o o o o ftH. >K, o w

M

n

&• O EH • • t • • • • t t • • ^ • M >^ CO CO CO CO 10 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO > > CO CO O • « • • • • • • • I s: M tn Cn (M In U b CM CM C w o B< M O -a; -CM-CM CM'CM r~ «- *-«-«- CM CM CM 04 CM CM CM O o O CM U •H -H •H -H -H -H •H +1 •H -H -H -H -H +1 -H •H +1 -H •H •H •H -H w

fe O co w O H H H w S r- co co co H H H H S 2 i & ft pCO. M oo O O t* be feft I* « O Oo O O O o o o ex Q +>o O O o o O o OOOOO o O o o o o o o w w m vn o o o o o ooooo o O o o o o o o o s »-1 u CO SO vO =T r- t— »— T~ »— r~ »— i— r- r~ »"• t— T— »— r- iT> «=C Z CM i I I I I t I I I I I « I I I I I I t I I M o <; 5f O o o O O o o OOOOO O O o o o o o o o S CO K i

< Q H ft r- r-. r- r- m o m in vO vO o CM W z . w o co > H 0 EH .4 co £-< CU Z < co H < > W z 9 w co « 3 > H H a O O O K D Q a. W -JO W H X M O M CM . CS! »• H M > 214 D O-»H CQ

UJ 00«W CQ H s: z « to o: c; en a; O u z u< ai t-< i£ t' M D r: M w is ^ di < o o N 3: CQ pr, O, p. t-J (X O o < KJ H H MM US o K w M ai

X < x a, p.. M D o o O S £ S IS o CJ DATE 1Q/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. A-1Q7 iv / <-u / c;|MIILAT|nN PRODUCTS n 1 V 1 9 1 DIM H J^ '

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

CO 2 i i ..-.-- tJ < < E-" > O O O O U " < « « st zr a- . o aw B- . • • . -o . . ' • • M V

.'••--• <0 • .. • - ' •• • 43 ^3 (y * w 10 ^ 4J ^j •fH O ^4 M4 C O EM • . tQ +J rH •o 'WO •6« Q Q ^ (1) O "O o a CN CO CO 1 O "O 'M C P4 •H H H • Q> '. O fV< «O (^ -Q O • 0) W ! . . • a w O 0 V t -H 0§ : ' Q) . • 4J A* O *~i CM CO *O C CU I) *r4 *H W O . . G CU ^ M W B C4 0 0 O E rtJ 0) W m - r- O 0) P< «rC O + » 0) M W B i» B . in . u -H o> M -P-H c~* f£ frt CM 03 03 1 3 m M O < rOE-tE-* O*w£C *w*o CO U. 1 41 CU M' O *O OQ) 00 B -H -r< C > * 0) •fH U-( CO CU W *H ^»$ jj 4J .H 4_> 0> 0) iH <0 O X «O O C*t * «tf in cu Q> ^i (u > CN CO M OM 2 •H P4 r-l 3 O O «-4 rt X5 C 3 iE 1 • 00 B M 4J -HO O a>

3 I ""'W O -HrHt-l«JOX3. (53 ! QJJ O *O SI fO ^W O Q^ Ct <£ D 0) 0) > to C > t^ t*1 fO - (0 A^ *O 'O H ^£ f*j rj) *p>{ A) C *O O r^ "4^ ^ . WHH r-4 • B M i(U J^tUC.'O 5 ^CN KZZCO 0>"O COOG CN W Q >«-l «}(0>-i O . 2S D D

§§dw >ri«slt?o*o M O O O >-l •'•' 3 Q O< 0 D 4-' . Q S w « « a o co H H 6-< H W ^ mvo. Q ooo>.z •—*-'—' *" *•* *~ ' THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4.393 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Table 4.20-9 will be alterable by modification of the con- 224 troller's software program.

Data to Vehicle for Recording. The controller will initiate a transmission of the parameters listed in Table 4.20-9 Data Transmitted to Recorder to the vehicle on the recorder channels every 40 plus or minus 2 milliseconds. The transmission of recorder data will not be interrupted by command words from the vehicle. The data words for recording will consist of 15 bits plus a parity bit per word. The number of logical "ones" in the data word, includ-

» ing the parity bit will sum to an odd number. The relation- ship of the word sync pulse, data bits, and parity bit will be shown in Figure 4.20-2 and will be transmitted on all recorder channels. A "no data".message will be all zeros.

Operational Capability. The controller will be capable of full operation with the vehicle after the vehicle interface has experienced one failure (Fail Operational). The controller will continue operation" in accordance with the most recent valid command after the vehicle interface has experienced a second failure (Fail Safe). The electron- ics interfacing with the vehicle in the controller must satisfy the requirement of no-single-point-failure (Fail Safe Design). Each failure in the receipt of a ccaimand DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-399 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTOM. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. word from the vehicle will be duly reported in the failure 224 identification provision in the transmission of engine status data and recorder data to the vehicle. The appropriate number will be inserted in the failure identification word. The number of occurrences will be contained in the test number word. Three consecutive transmission failures on any command channel will cause that command channel to be disqualified by the controller and the vehicle will have the capability to reset the command channel.

Ccrsmand. Validation. The command words from the vehicle to the controller will be verified by: (a) Correct number of bits per word (b) Parity check for each word (c) Direct vote of all operable inputs (d) Command execute word The numher of bits in each command word will include the parity bit and will equal 16 bits. The parity check of each word will sum the number of logical "ones" in a word, including the parity bit, to be an odd number. Command words from the vehicle which do not pass the number of bits per word or parity check will be disregarded and inhibited from entering the voting. Command words, which are received from the vehicle but not implemented with a DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-400 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. 1

REF. command execute word, will be disregarded upon receipt of 224 a new command word. •'

Command Channel Control. The controller will be capable,upon command of the vehicle, of disqualifying any single command channel which is found to be in error. Conversely, the controller will be capable, upon command of the vehicle, of removing the inhibit to any single command channel. Command words from the vehicle, to dis- qualify and restore individual command channels, will! be via remaining operational command channels.

Intervals Between Transmissions. Command words consisting of a word sync pulse with the data bits and parity bit equal to logical "zero" will be received from the vehicle whenever any command listed in Table 4.20-4 Vehicle to Engine Commands is not being transmitted. Transmissions to the vehicle during periods of inactive transmission of engine status, command word echo, or recorder data, will consist of data words containing a word sync pulse with the data bits and parity bit equal ,< to logical "zero". DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-401 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. A.20.3.2 CONTROLLER/ENGINE INTERFACES 224 Sensor Input/Output Interfaces. The controller will conform to the requirements of this specification when inter- faced with sensors having the following characteristics when installed on the engine. Sensor ranges and levels of .redundancy will .be .as .specified in.Table 4.20-10 Sensor Ranges and Redundancy Levels.

(a) Pressure -Sensors; Input Impedance: 1250 to 2500 ohms at 75F. Change with temperature, 0.

Excitation Voltage: 10.00 plus or minus 0.025 volts dc ( Output Voltage Range: 0 to 30 millivolts dc (nominal) Error Band: plus or minus 0.6 millivolts dc from nominal straight line Frequency Response: Greater than 600 rad per sec (equivalent first order) . : Sensor Repeatability.:; Readings taken on each sensor under the same pressure conditions will repeat within plus or minus 0.87 percent of the NPL reading at all applicable environmental conditions. This .is equivalent to plus or minus 0.75 percent of sensor full scale r"ange. Individual sensor calibration constants, derived from curve fitting equations, will be supplied for the software program defined in RC1010. The form of the equation is: y s a a,X a, X* .-. * a.X. O * THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-402 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVI SIGN

REV. .•-... BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

-/

> to" e "w £ 0 f . JC o O o ^e o o - j3 o in o 0 u in 0 o u CO in ; w II tO . ft? ft. ft. CO tf. ft. CO < OS to *^*Jl co a O ft. ft. ft. O U * '"^4 . -Z - -O^/f^to^o- -"Cn o 'ty <|jt4 •ft. tr> 'J~» • . -o" cr> u *t 400 o o O O O o * o o o o o C5 ^ * ^^ o » o 000. o o o o o o »o 0 o O o co o o in o o ro o o in o O o in in m o o sf -p CM «- m oo c» m r- CM i- • 1 O CO O «n O O O 000 O O o O O O •n O O O O O 0. Q z 4J CM -P t ' -P •P -P 4-* •P 4J P 4J- |> ^J CM 4J V -P P *-' W w Cf ^ w O I O O O o o o O 0 O O O O I O O 0 O O0 Q

. . • • t to .1 U] X A . u u £ : c f§ Q «• •» v tt ••• :' '•'. # _ o 2 m ro CM a- r- r- CM t- t™ CM ^ CM CM •- m m T- CM CM =» 1 £ D " 4J F 0 Q t 3 to : W • O 2! (X M o CO ' - x: ' 0 O «•"• W j^ I 0 o • •. H-. CM w to * M. CO "XJ ** ' D W 11 r-* -•. ft. CO iX to •. . CO ft. a 2 B fc) 4?f- D ft. W. EH w **. tiij.. ftl a. o ft< Z . -H 2 2 *"* Pj 0 CQ H 5 o CQ CG M W (X >«, £3 (X ft, H K IX OP u ft( D 0 P-« £3 £_| . D (X W c -^ o W H 0) w < H W H W «£ CO HJ CQ fX < PJ (X W RS (X iJ5 < (X X IU tu ^ D K Z D rx CQ a CM (X D O tX E- ii j. CM J3 CO W O EH to o D H w to 'o N M to t/) a. < O 2 CM H CO ft. M tO M to > t-3 tO M M ft. '/) M |T. M «C fX W 5I W H >j W EH to M U) £H Q X W (-J K j;hi a- , H J (X W H < W (X < to j Q tX • ^ M W it Z O fe : H rq ft. EH Q «C tX D ft. Q (X w w «c M ft. Q tX X H o. w < a h-iIL W W (X J3 ti u) (U X Ul W 0 O EH tul u< |l| t^ W W W 3 M W W M W Ui ri: IU a B rx ft. D M - o MUM •H O O t? ft. Q «> W O ft. > u EH a- O ft. > O C5 £•» (6 ft. ix (X w rx ix to i5 (X CO Z « < 3 w IX tO (X K tX tO PJ tO U4 <£ K CO O O ^ »J M to U Cn M . CQ s a. o CO O fc. M to U. U CO Q t, OM & CO CO CO < U Q W CO < Q w < >z z to to < Q w CO CO O M < M£J »-H W hH H X nD *3^ K M x rtl « X ('4 O w M X < (X M M O X fX X - k Q O CO In K ft. a co « ft* O EH t»4 - D co o; . ft. Q n ai o o o (r^. <|) i ft. ft. C; r 33 >J X O < jj O W u o CO 0 H D o H CD X tM X O) CO

U. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N04-4Q3 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

W (li E c JC J= O O W o e 00 O O x: o o o CN CN H o o II II in a. O O it O, cr. (0 < < IM <: s u, u. M —PS MM H (X M M M M O O O o om o o o O O 0 o 0 O O o c .p -p -P •P -P -P •p V 4-» «N CN a- O O O O O I O O O o o o

w« fc}g 5DS <_x> g 2 V 8 2 r- (N CM •

i .3QJ . ' * 2 O i-4 1 : O CM ,

iH

PS D .1 ' W W PS w D ' ns - OPERATIN G 2 - r'CN-OPtPATIN G . 1 PURG E PRESSURE / ' - 1 ..'-..-•• . : PS W cu ;

• PS : : E SEA L PURG AN D fLOWMETS R PERATUR E , . 1 R E CXIDIZE TUPBOPUM P .2 ' ( R E OXIDIZE TUFBOPUM P 1 , SSUR E . 1 F SEA L AN D BLEE VALV E ' . 1 • IO N PRESSUR E . 1 STE M PURG E PRESSUR . 1 FTOF F SEA L AN D $LEE ' . 1 L VIBRATIO N ' . 1 L SYSTE M . ••'.- • •• ; W L VIBRATIO N 1 CHAMBE R ' • ..' . ; \ .' .'-.. ITRO L PRESSURE - 'RESSUP E • ' " . .-, - •'" '- :SUR E . • :,.••• '• ' !A L PURG E PRESSUR ' . , W w : W W < H 2 W < & i g z Z u w us Z w W COW»-JOQ W^WCOCO "* tf- eJ v M o W H CU M H jjjj CQ £_< Q M U 1-5 Q W Z -Pi W US l>^ O W Q Cu uj u lu f H PS W PS < H cs Z H H "2 O W >H W W 1-^ cr, ci UJ OS Z CN tf. *€ tt« W PS H CO ^) M Z Z £-* w O • c*3 CO c*3 ^> *•^ E~^ Cu 3S W Cu M £3 tit U-» Cu P. CQ W M D CO fX M M M »J z us w ia PS W W liJ S cu to i-J i-4 ^3 0 a U Q J Q < h3 O ~ U !£ 25 (£ W CO CU U K J pi u; ai N o t-« 8 cu in y u (-5 < O U< O V PU f H M *H s 1 P-" Q z &^* P"i 1 fc~* M M Q w y. X JH z o 0 £ rn Cu u DAT THE SINGE R COMPANY PAGE N0 fO/20/72 SIMULATION PRC)DUCTS DIVISION '4-404

REV. BINGHAMTON . NEW YORK REP. NO.

1 : ...' !

1 iJ J (4. rt. «C • rf tf rf < a- s'a 2 2 2 2 ^^ ' '•" . . ^» •» Hi M ^^^ M M H H • s s s 2 S S S o o o O O I? 2 22 11 2 2 • gi c c K C C C c t: C C O >-3 »iH t^3 -r^ iH *4-r«.H »-5 «rt -H O v^ CO *€ X TO *£ X X to «; x x to < x x to < x x fij 2i Pi W 2 04 04 w 2 a a. u 2 a a w :i Q. a - . W M 1 W M 1 1 W M » 1 W M 1 « W H 4 1 2 w .pJ.X.CU •-jx.-S.Qj-O* .«.£ a P. a. s a a (X 2 CL, CL, o c o o ID O o o o o w w W 2 W W 2 CO to (U 2 CO CO W 2 CO CO t4 2 CO CO Q H Q H H O H H Q £- H C* ^ ^ C >-J »4 >J ! « CJ C J J 0-»* O O-H O O 0 -H O O O -H O O 0 •»-« C O •Sj ' fY* o\ ^> o* ^^ ^^ O> > t> o% ^> ^> ^? o^ ^\ ^> ^> sO vO « ; o O O O • O oo O vo O 00 CM UJ O CO CM W3 O 00 CM vO *J CM r- • 4^ CM t*- • 4J CM r« • rf?£> 'i ^rj • » • • tn • • U~) t • I/) • • IT> F=^ **H O CN »- O CM «- «- o «— .CM «~ O r- CM r- O »~ I'M «-

Q w • . '•'..--. • -• .'.'•'.•' -..!;._ •."•-.- • '. P < O : 2 " . ' . • • - ' . - - • -• • . . • to rt • . ..:'•:'' W 0 1 1 CM fM 0 2 I « CM 1 * CM CM 1 « CM CM 1 1 CM CM SS t3 ' «e£ Q

OS . " o W to • »j ^ w H £•« £-• < C- to H W H M «> M ' H iJ M M E-c Hf JH 1 o H W H •4! M CO > CO tj '/^ 1 ' to w . iyr o X >< 2 p; JM 2 ^ O >•• 2 CM B S W W E-< W < H W O t- W M M to > M CO U •-< CO * W H CO H > ** i M H H D M H « ^• i tH U. M^ t-l H H Q H H P W H Q CO t- Q a M H > X H > tJ H > a H i> pa O CO iJ M to j s CO »J S W 2 2 Q 2 •a; 2 H I W ^ f'l i 1 Hi W A M K 1-4 1-3 W W *3 W CO O w w co o x W CO O O hi .r. o S*i ft, 5^ O 2 X O O « O ;< c i W O H > O H P< o, o t-i & O H CM i'. o t c- W > pr. Q K Q CO D i£ Q (0 ^. IX Ul W O it. .~J to U , t-* > 1C H > fq t-i > W H > M t> > 0) i-J I'i ! H > 3 CO *-} M W M W M CO f-4 vU ^ 10 »•! M H > t>» > (4 . > "• > t/j > ^ .u. tu .-1 Ul M; 2 tJu ui M 2a,u,»-l CL .2 U. « •-} D D H) • O O O ^ OOO-^ . o o o «a: eu ou o o o «j; >;. > 14 M H H > m M b' t- > ^ CM U, t-4 p E-'<:' C x H<«:O W H < < O Ci i- -x < o CM < O PM > c^ < D D > Cu 8 «: D D > {H E^ ^ H H E-i « H H H H * H H E-' n. £V« « O 'J CJ t>i H 2 OOU 2 OUUW Q O CJ CJ W ^ ACTUATO F ACTUATO F SiRVOVA L M «<< M « s 02 O s s o ^ "•' < O CO

00 r " 01 P) U- DATE THE SINGER COMPANY RAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVI

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

H Q W O W O > O K M H M M H H P OS CO iJ 14 CO *£ rt 2 2 D W 2 D W c M" CXCW O MOW o «&. S S CO o o O S 0 2 O O a: H OS CO c C ff | ; M •H ! C5 <: w ! 2 2 o fO 2 O i O 2 m o 2 a i a •- H *C a O OS CO O OS CO o O H OH co O P* Q W O On O W 2 4J O O 4> O O US CM <£ p^ CM rtl CO O CU O fa o o< o fa s X o

CO Q 2 I *- O a w W (X

O CO

CO

I o

w X H H W H Q a w H CO CO i w Q 2 (Q 2- W W W tt, w co CM !| M cd O H O EH cu a. Q Pi Q1 H > w W CO ^ ed DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-406- SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

KEF. oo/.

(b) Temperature Sensors: . * * ' • •. 3 Sensor Output: RT/RQ= 1+a [ (T - 6 T (T-100)/10*) - B T (T-100) /10« ] where: T = Temperature in Centigrade a = 0.00391 to 0.0039275

6 = 1.492 ± 0.07 3 = 0.11 ± 0.035 ; R = Sensor resistance at T (ohms)

R0= Sensor resistance at OC =.50±1, 200±2, 1380±3, or 5000±10 ohms as specified in Table '4.20-10

j Sensor Excitation 2 milliamperes dc maximum : Current: i : Sensor Response: Equivalent first-order time constant of 0.5 sec for sensors with R0 of 50 and 200 ohms; 0.1 sec for sensors with R0 of 1380 and 5000 ohms at the engine operating flowrate conditions . . '. sensor Repeatability: Readings taken on each sensor under the same temperature conditions will repeat within plus or minus 0.25 percent of the measurement span at all applicable environmental condi- tions. Individual sensor calibration constants, derived from curve fitting equa- tions, will be supplied for the software program defined in RC1010. The form of the equation is: Y = a, X <•

CO 0> CO DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 224

(c) Flow Sensors Sensor Coil Resistance: 1500 ohms rraximum . be.nsor Coil Inductance: 1.0 henry maximum at 1 K Hz Sensor Output Voltage: 0.2 minimum to 10.0 maximum ..(Peak to Peak) (Eased on resistive load of 10 plus or minus 2 K ohms) over the frequency range of 5 to 500 Hz. Flowmeter Frequency Greater than 200 rad per sec Response: (equivalent first order) 3 Sigma Precision: plus or minus 0.45 percent of reading at all applicable environmental conditions Pulse characteristics for flow sensor outputs are TBD.

(d) PpsitiQn_Sensgrs_--_ServQ-ryalyesijand Bleed Valves Sensor Primary Current: 20 milliamperes maximum Sensor Excitation 20 volts peak-to-peak Voltage: (nominal) Sensor Excitation 2000 plus or minus 100 Hz Frequency: Sensor Output Range: minus 0.25 to plus 0.25 volts peak-to-peak (nominal) when operating into a 10 K ohm resistive load Sensor Error Band: •v plus or minus 0.5 percent of point plus or minus 0.5 percent full scale deviation from nominal ., ' straight line Output Phase 0 to 5 degrees Shift: 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 224

(e) Vibration Sensors Sensor Source Capaci- 2000 picofarad minimum tance: Sensor Output Voltage: 5.0 plus or minus 0.7 milli- volt RMS per g RMS operating into a load of 300 picofarads in parallel with 100 megohms. Sensor Frequency Range: 1 Hz to 6 K Hz (300 g) for radial (turbopumps) 100 Hz to 15 K Hz (1000 g) for longitudinal (combustors) Sensor Frequency Re- Greater than 10 K Hz sponse: (equivalent first order) Vibration sensors are for the purpose of obtaining and recording engine maintenance trend data. Controller input circuits for the longitudinal vibration sensors shall be capable of selectively sampling predetermined frequency windows throughout the frequency range of the sensor. Controller input circuits for the radial vibration shall be sensitive to a narrow frequency band centered about the fundamental rotating frequency of the appropriate turbopump. Vibration sensor inputs shall be demodulated and sampled at a frequency rate sufficient to satisfy the data requirements for the vibration parameters listed in Table' 4.. 20-9 Data Transmitted to Recorder. . . DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 PAGE N0.4_409 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 224

(f) Position Sensorsi - Hydraulic Actuators Sensor Primary Current: 20 milliamperes maximum V Sensor Excitation 20 volts peak-to-peak Voltage: (nominal) •Sen'sox 2000 plus or minus 100 Hz. Frequency: Sensor Output Range: 0.25 to 4.75 volts peak-to-peak (nominal) .when operating into a 10 K ohm resistive load Sensor Error Band: plus or minus 0.5 percent of point plus or minus 0.5 percent full scale deviation from nominal straight line Sensor Output Phase 0 to 5 degrees Shift:-' (gj Speed Sensors Sensor Coil Resistance: 1500 ohms maximum Sensor coil Inductance: 0,1 henry maximum at 1 K Hz Sensor Output Voltage: 0.2 minimum to 16.0 maximum (Peak-to-Peak) (Based on resistive load of 10 plus or minus 2 K ohms) Sensor Output Frequency APO Hz to 10 K Hz Range:

;Pulse characteristics for speed sensor outputs are TBD. ; (h) Leak^Detectipn^ Sensors \ '• . • . - , '.".'• Leak detection sensors may be added at a'later date. Since sensor and 'circuit characteristics are not defined, space equivalent to 80 square inches of circuit board shall be reserved. DATB0/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NOA.AIQ ^IMULATI^N PP<""DUrTS DIVISI ON *t *t.LV

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Igniter and Control Devices Interface. The controller 224 will conform to the requirements of this specification when interfaced with igniters and control devices having the " following characteristics when installed on the engine.

(a) Sgr yoac t_ua_.t or s Servovalve Load Resistance; 500 ohms max. Servovalve Current Range; ± 20 milliamperes dc Actuator Closed-Loop Frequency Response; (Equiv. second order): Main Oxidizer Valve Area: 4 to 10 Hz Oxidizer Preburner Oxidizer Valve Area : 12 to 20 Hz .' Fuel Preburner Oxidizer Valve Area: 12 to 20 Hz Combustion Coolant Valve Area: 12 So 20 Hz Actuator Closed-Loop Damping Ratio: 0.5 minimum Actuator Closed-Loop Threshold : 1% full scale max. Actuator ^Closed-Loop Slew Rate; Main Oxidizer Valve Area: 150 to 300% / per c second Main Fuel Valve Area: 2SO td 400% per second Oxidizer Preburner Oxidizer Valve Area:? 150 to 250% per second Fuel Preburner Oxidizer Valve Area: 150 to 250% per second Combustion goolant Valve Area: 150 to 250% per second DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. LO/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. (b) Solenoid Valves (Non-Latching) 224 Coil Current (Energizing):. 1 ampere dc max. • Coil Current (Holding): 0.5 ampere dc max. Coil Voltage (On): 26 volts dc max. Valve Response Time; "Pneumatic - Electrically Actuated: 20 milliseconds max. Pneumatic - Pressure actuated: 50 milliseconds max. Hydraulic Actuator Solenoids: 14 milliseconds max. Coil Inductance: 0.05 to 0.3 henries Valve response time is defined as the time interval from the application of the electrical signal to the completion of i the travel of the actuated device.

(c) Spark Igniters Igniter Power Supply Current (On): 1 ampere dc max. Igniter Control Current (on): 50 milliamperes dc max. Igniter Voltage (On): 26 volts dc max. The servoactuators and solenoid coils will be driven by current sources. The controller will-contain networks to suppress electrical transients and protect solenoid coil driver circuits. The spark igniters will be driven by voltage sources. The solenoid valve and igniter control current in the off-state will not exceed 5 milliamperes dc and 1 milli- c ampere dc, respectively. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-412 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 4.20.3.3 GROUND EQUIPMENT INTERFACE 224 The controller shall contain ground support equipment • (GSE) interface connections in accordance with RC1009. The GSE interface will be capable of duplicating the commands and data transttiission normally provided through the vehicle/ engine electrical interface, and the controller will be capable of operating the engine while installed on the vehicle through this GSE interface. Controller electrical power will be supplied through the vehicle power interface during this mode of operation. The GSE interface will con- tain provisions for complete reprogramming and verification - of the controller memory without removing the controller from the engine. The controller design will preclude accept- ance of commands from the vehicle/engine electrical interface when the GSE interface is connected to operating external ground equipment. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N04-4]_3 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION REV. B'INGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 4.20.4 CONTROLLER HARDWARE 42 4.20.4.1 INPUT ELECTRONICS DESCRIPTION The input electronics (Figure 4.20-3) receive analog and pulse rate signals from all inflight sensors, including temperature, pressure, vibration, position, rotational speed and flow rate. Built-in test signals from other portions of the controller are also received. The incoming signals are "conditioned" by amplification, filtering and/or demodu- lation and then converted to digital form suitable for the computer. Data from nonflight sensors for test stand requirements are not processed through the input electronics.

Because two independent digital computers are necessary for fail-operational/fail-safe performance, two sets of input electronics are provided. One set of input electronics is assigned to each digital computer. These sets are designated as Number 1 and Number 2.

In addition, each of the two sets of electronics contains three redundant data channels, designated A, B, and C, to match the triple redundant inputs from the performance ,* control sensors (see Figure 4.20-4). Inputs from dual redundant limit control sensors, non-redundant maintenance data sensors, and built-in test are distributed among the three data channels in a manner which preserves redundancy DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-414

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

Figure 4.20-3 Input Electronics THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-415

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

INPUT ELECTRONICS IKPUT ELECTRONICS HO.I COKTROl CONTROL

CHANNEL 1C COMPUTER CHANNEL IB \ ->OATA READY INTERFACE ELECTRONICS CHANNEL IA NO. I

-> DIGITAL DATA

INPUT ELECTRONICS NO.2 CONTROL •CONTROL ENGINE DATA AMD ANALOG CHANNEL 2C BUILT-IN TEST COMPUTER CHANNEL 28 I ->OATA READY INTERFACE - I ELECTRONICS CK.ANNEL 2A ' NO. 2

DIGITAL DATA

Figure 4.20-4 Input Electronics Organization THE SINGER COMPANY DAT! PAGE NO. 4.416 iO/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. and at the same time achieves equality of signal flow between 42 the channels. The latter is significant because it minimizes data processing time and achieves a fast high response sampling rate. Each of the three data channels in a set of input electronics processes approximately one-third of all the engine inflight sensor outputs.

Inpjj t^Clianne^l^Func t ion The basic function of each input channel is to convert the analog and pulse rate sensor and built-in test signals to digital form. In order to handle the many pieces of data from multiple sensors with a minimum of hardware, each channel samples or multiplexes the data in a time sequence. Each input is sampled once every 20 msecond operating cycle, conditioned, converted to digital format, and sent to the computer interface electronics.

The signal conditioning and conversion functions for a typical data channel are shown in Figure 4.20-5. To minimize hardware costs, all data channels are identical. The only functional differences are minor variations in the quantities and types of inputs to each channel to accommodate the requirements for sensor redundancy. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION '4-417

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

fROM CONTROL

TEMPERATURE SENSORS

PRESSURE I SEKSORS

AKALOC BUHT-IN TEST

VIBRATION SENSORS CG.-PUTER INTERFACE ELECTRONICS POSITION NO. I SENSORS I

SPEED AND FlCW SEKSCRS

Figure 4.20-5 Input Electronics Channel (Typical 1 of 6)

CD O CO THE SINGER COMPANY DAT( PAGE N0.4_418 iO/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK ' REP. NO.

REF. Each input channel has.s the following additional 42 functions: . 1. Distributes redundant dc excitation voltages to the temperature and pressure sensors, and provides reference voltages to the analog-to-digital converters.

2. Generates signals for self-calibration.

3. Provides test signals and switching for sensor calibration and integrity checks.

4. Accepts analog built-in test inputs from power supply and output electronics.

Each input data channel is independently supplied from two sets of redundant power supply regulators. Sensor excitation and converter reference voltages are supplied from the^satne regulators used to power the respective elec- tronics to take advantage of the resulting cancellation of errors from power supply voltage variations. Failure of a data channel or its regulated power supplies will not propagate into another channel. Figurer£;20-5 presents a complete discussion of power supply decoupling and redundancy. DAT0.0/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-419 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF Types of Inputs 42 Two categories of inputs are processed: one is analog • and the other is a variable pulse rate where the voltage amplitude and the pulse rate, respectively, are proportional to the measured parameter.

Analog temperature, pressure, vibration, position, and built-in test signals are conditioned through low-level multiplexer gates, amplifiers, and/or modulators to achieve a common scale factor. As shown in Figure 4.20-5, these are then gated through a high-level multiplexer to the analog-to- digital converter. The analog-to-digital converter trans- forms the high-level multiplexer analog outputs to digital words. Parallel sequencing of the analog-to-digital conver- sion in all three channels is regulated by the computer interface electronics through a common control in each set of electronics. At fixed intervals, when a conversion is complete, the three data channel digital outputs are trans- ferred sequentially by the computer interface electronics • , to the computer to update the memory. The transfer is com- pleted inl memory cycle (1 microsecond). Data transfer of sensor and built-in test values continues until all inputs have been sampled. The process is repeated every 20 msec for a new sampling cycle. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE N0.4_420 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. A common control unit associated with each set of 42 input electronics regulates the sequencing of the multiplex- ing and the analog-to-digital conversion in the three associated data channels by decoding control, signals from the computer interface electronics.

Low-1c-Low-level multiplexing reduces the number of components by requiring a single high-gain amplifier for up to eight temperature or pressure inputs. It also improves performance by permitting calibration and reference signals to be multi- plexed through the high-gain amplifiers to check and correct amplifier gain and offset. Normalizing all the high-level multiplexer inputs to a common scale factor reduces the number of multiplexer components by a factor of 2.

Pulse rate shaft speed and flow rate signals are con- verted directly to digital format by measuring the pulse period with a high frequency precision clock signal. This yields the reciprocal of the measured parameter. Each pulse rate input is processed through a separate converter. When a conversion is complete, the computer interface electronics transfer the data to the computer in 1 microsecond to update the memory. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 4.421 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Analog Signal Processing 42 Processing of.the various analog inputs for a typical channel shown in Figure 4.20-5 is as follows:

1. Temper a t u rft .sen s or dc inputs to each channel are processed through a corresponding number of low-level multi- plexer gates to one common progratnable-gain amplifier. A reference ground is multiplexed into the amplifier just prior to each sensor signal. This improves accuracy by erasing residual signals from prior inputs. Sensor operating range and range midpoint values are multiplexed simultaneously with each sensor input to adjust the amplifier gain and offset for maximum dynamic scaling. The high-gain amplifier output is gated through the high-level multiplexer to the analog-to- digital converter.

2. Pressure sensor dc inputs are processed in a manner similar to those of temperature sensors. The number of inputs to each high-gain amplifier is limited to ensure that gate leakage does fiot adversely affect the-precision of the low- level pressure signals.

3. Vibration sensor ac inputs are individually ampli- fied, filtered, and multiplexed directly through the high- level multiplexer to the analog-to-digital converter. The THE SI.NGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. . /00 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-422

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. amplifier is operated in the current mode to protect the 42 high-impedance, lowrlevel signal from electrical noise pickup in the engine or in the controller. In this mode the signal from the sensor feeds directly to the input of an operational amplifier acting as a charge integrator.

4. Linear position sensor ac inputs are demodulated to an analog voltage, scaled, and multiplexed directly to the analog-to-digital converter. The use of an operational amplifier and full-wave synchronous demodulation provides good accuracy and high-frequency response.

5. Analog built-in test signals from the output electronics and the power supply electronics are gated through the high-level multiplexer to the analog-to-digital converter. Calibration signals to verify the operation and/ or accuracy of the input electronics are supplied in accord- ance with Table 4.20-11. The measured outputs are used by the computers to continuously recalibrate the input 61ee- tronics by automatic software changes:

* - "Digital output word format is 12 bits from the analog- to-digital converter. Twelve bits provide a resolution of one part in 4095 or 0.025 percent, which is more than adequate to meet engine accuracy requirements. Total THE SINGER COMPANY DATEJ.O/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-423 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF, 42

TABLE 4.20-11 INPUT ELECTRONICS CALIBRATION

TEST SIGNAL USAGE IN GP.O'JNO FUNCTION TYPE INPUT OUTPUT- MEASURES FLIGH- CHECKOUT

ANALOG TO DIGITAL HIGM-LEVEL MULTIPLEXER ANALOG/DIGITAL (A/0) CONVERTER CAIN CONVERTER VOLTAGE CONVERTER OUTPUT

REFERENCE CROU'I; HIGH-LEVEL MULTIPLEXER A/0 CONVERTER OUTPUT CONVERTER OFFSET

HIGH-LEVEL MULTIPLEXER REFERENCE HIGH-LEVEL MULTIPLEXER ANALOG/DIGITAL (A/0) MULTIPLEXER VOLTAGE CONVERTER OUTPUT OPERATION * HIGH-GAIN AMPLIFIER REFERENCE LOW-LEVEL MULTIPLEXER A/0 CONVERTER OUTPUT AMPLIFIER GAIN VOLTAGE

REFERENCE LOU-LEVEL MULTIPLEXER A/0 CONVERTER OUTPUT AMPLIFIER OFFSET

LOW-LEVEL MULTIPLEXER ?.£F£R£UCE LOW-LEVEL MULTIPLEXER A/0 CONVERTER OUTPUT MULTIPLEXER VOLTAGE OPEP.ATION

ACCELE?.ATIO,-|;AI'?LIF|[R AMPLIFIER INPUT A/0 CONVERTER OUTPUT AMPLIFIER GAIN VOLTAGE

LINEAR POSITION (I) CEK03ULATOR

PULSE RATE CONVERTER KNOWN FREQUENCY REDUNDANT REDUNDANT PULSE SENSOR AND CON- SENSOR WINDING RATE CO'iVEP.TER- VERTER OPERATION

(I) CALI5V.TEO CL'?.INr, 3UILT-IH TEST SY CO.".?A=>.ISON OF COMMANDED POSITION WITH THAT DERIVED FR0.1 DEMODULATED LINEAR VARIA3LE DIFFERENTIAL T?.£NS UCER FEEDBACK DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4r424 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTCM. NEW YORK REP. NO.

E.EF accuracy of the analog-to-digital converter is HK3.223 percent 42 random and 0.07 percent non-random.

Si. gn a 1__C on t r ol All multiplex switching and analog-to-digital conver- sions are under the control of the computer interface elec- tronics. A conversion cycle is initiated every 200 inicrosec. upon receipt of an 11-bit word from the control unit in each set of input electronics (Figure 4.20-4). Eight bits contain the addresses of the multiplexer gages to be closed for that particular conversion, and 3 bits provide synchronizing information.. Control of the multiplexing and conversion process occurs in the following sequence;

1. Receipt of coded control signal by the control. Control addresses and closes desigmated low- and high-level gates in the three channels (A, B, and C). Control admits timing clock signal to analog-to-digital converters.

2. Timing circuits initiate analog-to-digital conver- sion after a suitable settling time.

3. Upon completion of conversion (which requires an average of 110 microseconds, excluding settling and decoup- ling time), each converter sends adata ready signal to the computer interface electronics. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO.4_425 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. A. When data ready signals are received from all three 42 channels, the computer interface electronics sequentially acquires the digital data from the converters. If due to a failure, a data ready signal is not received from one or more channels within 190 microsec of initiation of the conversion, the acquisition is performed on the remaining channels.

The process is then repeated for a new set of multiplexed signals. All input signals are sampled once every 20 msec.

Pulse Rate Signal Processing Each pump speed or flow rate signal is routed directly to its respective pulse-rate-to-digital converter. The pulse period is measured by a clock signal to provide an output proportional to the reciprocal of pulse rate. Pulse-rate- to-digital conversion occurs asynchronously with the analog- to-digital conversion. The frequency of conversion is pro- portional to the pulse rate. As each conversion is completed, a data ready signal is transmitted to the computer interface electronics. .The output is held in the converter for a period * dependent upon the incoming pulse rate. The computer inter- face electronics has the option of acquiring the output data during this period or waiting for the next output if occupied with higher priority operations. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-426 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. The pulse-rate-to-digital converter outputs are 16-bit 42 words, providing a resolution of 0.015 percent at full scale (minimum pulse period) and 0.0015 percent at 10-percent scale,

4.20.4.2 COMPUTER INTERFACE ELECTPX'NICS DESCRIPTION The computer interface electronics (Figure 4.20-6) control data flow to and from the computers. Each of two electronic sets (Figure 4.20-7) is dedicated to a computer and a set of input electronics performing the functions of:

1. Transferring the commands and data requests from the vehicle/engine data bus interface to the com- puter, and the data responses from the computer to the vehicle/engine data bus.

2. Controlling the flow of data between the computer and the input and output electronics.

3. Monitoring computer operation by watch-dog timers.

4. Providing a redundant time reference to the * digital computer.

The above functions are performed by groups of circuits in each set of electronics, as shown in Figure 4.20-8. These are: DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-427 REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF.

Figure 4.20-6 Computer Interface Electronics DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-428

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF.

DATA 80S INTERFACE:

ACQUISITION CONTROL OR TEST UNITS (ACT.)

DATA CONTROL ELECT\:MCS NO. i ->9IO ADDRESS INPUT ELECTRONICS DATA REA5Y -P-CONTROL NO. I •DIGITAL BUILT-IN TEST DIGITAL DATA- OUTPUT ELECTRONICS CCM.'UTcS ISTE.'.fACE ELECTRONICS KO. 2 t* DIO DATA CONTROL « —{>OIO ADDRESS INEUT ELECTRONICS DATA READY - KO. 2 •DIGITAL DIGITAL OATA- BUILT-IN TEST

LEGEND DIO • DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT V V DMA " DIRECT MEMORY POWER DIGITAL DIGITAL POViR SUPPLY DATA AMD DATA AND SUPPLY yCOSTPOLC^

COMPUTER COKPUTER KO. I NO. 2

Figure 4v20-7 Computer Interface Electronics Organization THE SINGER DATE in/20/7? COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-429 /Z r ' ' ^IMULATI^N PR"DU TS D VSI ON

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

VEH CLE/ES5IVE DATA > REF. *• ''EflA GATE x : *> OATA 42 ' - CLOCK VEHICLE j CLOCK I a DATA DATA } MCORCER i DATA £ LS MILTIf LEXER 2. =.ECC*Cf ?]_ _^ SWITCH ") 4 ^ "fr V f-*~ J 2ATA SVITCH — ^! K.'LTIPLEXER f-i>

• "[ f ^ V DATA f REQUESTS. y _, . CCC-MAItDS, CCHTRCL •s*w&?fi*Te/ " ^» •*• - lift- ••n.gSB3CS^», ! x^ Ft TV C7>- I*-TI " -. "*• - -

;.,^-^»'U'" i OKA OATA^- si •__ *"_ *^ ^ i !- •r- •fc. \-^--- i ^. -v'-rt^*1**-***1-^**** | f, CHANNEL B COMPUTER V INTERFACE - CONTROL .E WESTS. "> J i r ' ^ ... c JATA SUS* j j ' . - 10. 2 "S WATChsaa TIKES • ' L ** 010 1 j, „ 1f^- > CH- -<> H » L- ADSRESslcUTPUT ] | ^7"^. RtH Tlr£ ELECTROS ICS A ,L J L T. "S

! . \ * --i> B _ OICITAL J BJILT-IN -~^i> T— -1 $ U TEST ; INPUT J -.' ELECTRONICS \ ^ DIRECT t 1 MO. 1 •i.-CSY -3 • Y s.- -^ CONTROL <- ACCESS ^ -^' ' J -~ - i •T— — J CCNTSOL < ^ 1 DATA _-_ P.EA3Y

I ,, , I 1 -&A DATA V ,,» 1 _.. 1 V DM " COM, 010 NO. DATA T 1L :^ *»•«» WT* DATA *• wi-'w--- ^UT,^I CONTROL VAn."..vu _ CONTROL T* p - - . PRIORITY ow p)0 aoc ^ K K INTERRUPT ADDRESS. DATA ClOC IKERRRUPT ^ CCSTR3L CO.-.PtTER NO.

< co p igure 4.20-8 Computer Interface Electronics No. 1 CO at m (Typical 1 of 2) b_ DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-430 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 1. Data Bus Multiplexer - Provides the communication 42 link between the controller and the vehicle. This communi- • cation link is bidirectional, receiving commands and data requests from the vehicle and transmitting the requested data to the vehicle. Commands and data are transmitted via '-redundant-vehicle data'bttses. These data buses interface with the controller through Acquisition, Control and Test (ACT) units.

2. Direct Memory Access Input Multiplexer - Processes all data entering the computer memory through the direct memory access (DMA) input. This includes data from the associated set of input electronics and from the data bus multiplexer. The DMA multiplexer is triple redundant to match the redundancy of the control sensors and their input electronics. Multiplexer control is provided by the DMA control.

3. Real Time Clock • Provides the computer with redundant time references to initiate, the start of each 20 msec control cycle. i J f ;

4. Direct Memory Access Control - Controls the flow of data in and out of the memory via the DMA data channel. Data is transferred into the memory by halting computer DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-431 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF, 42 operations for 1 tnicrosec memory cycle for each data transfer. Requests for access to the memory are granted on a priority basis. The order of priority is: a. Vehicle commands and requests for data. b. Analcg-to-digital converter data. c. Pulse-rate-to-digital converter data.

5. Watchdog Timer - Monitors computer operation to verify that it is progressing through its program per a pre- determined schedule. Two watchdog timers are used with each computer to .ensure fail-safe computer monitoring.

Data Bus Multiplexer The controller interfaces with the vehicle through two Acquisition, Control, and Test (ACT) units and a vehicle recorder bus (Figure 4.20-8). The ACT units transmit coiranands and data requests to the controller and receive requested data from the controller. Engine maintenance data is sent by the controller directly to the recorder data bus. One « ACT unit is normally in control with the other in-standby. The data bus multiplexer is capable of communicating with either at any time. As all communication with both sets of computer interface electronics is identical, only one is discussed in detail. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-432 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REFt Each data bus multiplexer has four signal paths with 42 the ACT unit: clock, data input, data output and data gate. The clock serves to clock the data into and out of .the con- troller and operates continuously. The data input supplies the controller with vehicle commands. The data output transmits controller data to the vehicle when enabled by the data gate.

The controller accepts inputs from the two ACT units through separate connectors. The vehicle recorder, used to record engine maintenance data, has data channels dedicated to each engine. The data is transmitted to the recorder bus from the controlling computer.

Direct Memory Access (DMA) Input Multiplexer Data from the input electronics and the data bus multi- plexer is gated into the memory through the DMA input multi- plexer. Each of the two multiplexers (No. 1 and No. 2) includes three channels (A, B, and C) that interface with the corresponding channels of the input electronics. The A channels also interface with their respective data bus multiplexers. The functional arrangement of channel 1A is shown in Figure 4.20-9. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

DATA BUS WLTIPLEXER DATA GATE (ChANNEL IA AHO 2A OHLV)

PULSE RATE TO DIGITAlTOATA GATES

V CO-P'JTER KO.I

Figure 4.20-9 Direct Memory Access Input Multiplexer Channel (Typical 1 of 6) DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTCN. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Each of the six multiplexer channels includes one 42 12-bit gate for analog-to-digital converter data and seven 16-bit gates for pulse-rate-to-digital converter data. As indicated in Figure 4.20-9, channel 1A (and 2A) include an eighth 16-bit gate for data bus multiplexer data. The data -is -gated -under -control -of "the DMA control unit.

Real Time Clock Each computer interface electronics includes redundant real time clocks. The function of the clock is to interrupt the computer at precise time intervals. As shown in Figure 4.20-10, each real time clock consists of a four-section counter with means for setting time in to and reading time out of the counter. This provides the capability of perform- ing specific tasks in real-time.

In normal operation, the counter is incremented by the incomings-clock frequency. When the gate becomes true, the counter is reset and an external priority interrupt is sent to the computer. This interrupts the-computer to increment a time location in memory by one. A new cycle is initiated when the preset time location overflows from all ones to all zeros. At the time of the new cycle, the computer also presets the time location and countdown resumes for the next cycle. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 PAGE SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

RE?. 42

REAL TIME CLOCK N0.1A

010 ADDRESS.- COHTROL GATE (16 BITS) . CONTROL DIO CATA CCKFUTER N0.1 ( ( IN r ri f T

DIVIDE— ... -OIVICE CLOCK DIVIDE DIVIDE BY 16 EY 16 BY 16 BY 16 ._ rnr TITT ? ] j-i -rrn.::

o~ o- CLOCK o... •JKTERRUPT CC.-.?UTER NO.) (16 BITS)

DIO DATA

Figure 4.2GLT10 Real Time Clock (Typical 1 of 4)

00 en DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 PAGE NO. £_436 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. When operational requirements demand a higher sampling 42 rate, i.e., when limit monitoring indicates a parameter is • beyond limits, the computer programs a smaller number into the memory time location and the sampling period is propor- tionately shorter.

To ensure that a clock failure will be detected, each computer is provided with two real time clocks. The clock; outputs are periodically compared during built-in test, and if they differ, appropriate action is taken.

Direct Memory Access Control The function of the direct memory access control unit is to regulate the data flow in an orderly manner and in accordance with a set order of priorities. To perform this, function, the direct memory access control (Figure 4.20-11) is organized into a hierarchy of three channels. Each channel accepts data requests, memory addresses and control signals, and transmits data transfer and memory address control signals. Each channel includes the necessary decoders, counters, and priority and sequence control logic to perform the above functions. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-437

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. /.t

COt.tANOS *IO CONTROL INTERFACE , DATA REVESTS I OATA BUS 1 AS3'CONTROL 'EL'ECTP.GNICS CATA REQUESTS I MULTIPLEXER NO.I X0.2

> CONTROL-OKA IHPLTT MULTIPLEXER

DATA RE/OY

CONTROL

INPUT ELECTRONICS NO. I

DATA

CLOr', 010 CHA AB:°.ESS. AOC.'.ESS, CONTROL CONTROL

Figure 4.20-11 Direct Memory Access Control (Typical 1 of 2) DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-438. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Channel 1 Data Bus Control first priority is to vehicle 42 commands and data requests. Upon receipt of a command or data request from the data bus multiplexer, the data bus control will service the request by providing a memory output within 3 microseconds. If either Channel 2 or 3 is trans- ferring data,-Channel 1 will interrupt at the completion of the 16-bit transfer in process and will assume control. When the Channel 1 transfer is complete, control will be relinquished to the channel with the next highest priority. The validated command is transferred to both computers, since normally only one ACT unit is operational at a time. . Data requests from either data bus multiplexer activate the DMA control to route the requested data onto the DMA data bus by the requesting data bus multiplexer. Channel 2 Analog to Digital Converter Control provides second priority control for data transfer to memory from the analog-to-digital con- verters^- Channel 2 normally receives a data-ready signal from each of the three converters when a conversion is complete. When the three-signals have been received or when a predetermined time h,as elapsed, the ready data is trans- ferred sequentially to dedicated locations.in the memory. Memory locations for converters which have not issued a data ready signal are coded in the upper four bits to prevent the processing of incorrect or obsolete data. Channel 2 DATfO/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-439 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF* will not transfer data while Channel 1 is servicing a request 42 and has the same priority relationship with Channel 3 as Channel 1 with Channel 2.

Channel 3, Pulse Rate to Digital Converter Control, processes pulse rate converter data in a manner similar to Channel 2, except that both Channels 1 and 2 have higher priority.

Watchdog Tiir

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

FAILURE INDICATES CONTROL

RMft- RETRICC^-ABLE KONOS7A31.E KOtTIVIBRATOR

Figure 4.20-12 Watchdog Timer - (Typical 1 of 4)

If the computer fails to reset either of its watchdog timers, the output goes to zero. A failure indication by the watchdog timer for computer No. 1 will cause the output switch described in paragraph 4.20.4.4 to transfer control to computer No. 2. Simultaneously, the watchdog timer will issue a con- trol signal to the power supply electronics to cause shutdown of computer No. 1 power. The shutdown procedure includes a HALT instruction to the computer to prevent further processing. A failure in No. 2 computer subsequent -to a failure in No. 1 will cause the No. 2 watchdog timer to remove computer power, issue a HALT instruction, and remove power from the output electronics to enable a fail-safe shutdown. Each computer monitors the watchdog timer output of the other to determine DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. .4--441 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. operational status which is made available to the vehicle 42 by the controlling computer.

4.20.4.3 DIGITAL COMPUTER DESCRIPTION TV-JO independent digital computers (Figure 4.20-13 and 4.20-14) receive cornmands from the vehicle and data from the sensors. Each performs the computations necessary for full- authority closed-loop control of the engine thrust and mixture ratio. Each computer also schedules the sequencing commands for all phases of ground and flight operations.

Normally, computer No. 1 is in control and computer No. 2 is in operational standby. In the event of a failure in computer No. 1 or its power supply, control is transferred to computer No. 2 without impairing engine operation.

In addition to the primary function of engine control each computer performs the following functions: 1. Accepts maintenance data from the sensors, stores the information in the memory and transmits it to « the vehicle upon request.

t , 2. Performs continuous self test.

3. Monitors the performance of the engine sensors, igniters, valves, actuators, and the other computer. THE SINGER COMPANY DATio/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-442 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 •••

Figure 4.20-13 Digital Computer

COMPUTER COMPUTER IMT£F.-AC£ IHTcftrACE CLECTROKICS ELECTRONICS NO.) NO. 2

DIGITAL DIGITAL SUPPLY DATA AND SUPPLY DATA AND CONTROL COMTML

COMPUTER MO. I t CO.«tfL'TER NO. 2

Figure 4.20-14 Digital Computer Organization DAT THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. /'.,., f0/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-443

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 4. Stores sensor calibration constants and uses •+£. them to correct raw sensor data.

; '.' 5. Measures and compensates for errors introduced into the sensor data by the signal conditioning and analog-to-digital conversion circuitry of the input electronics.

Computer Selection The Honeywell HDC-601 computer with a plated-wire memory is used for the SSME controller application. The HDC-601 was selected for the following reasons:

1. Off the shelf. The HDC-601 .is a fully developed digital computer and has been in production on two U. S. Air Force programs for over six months. Commercial equiva- lents, the H-316 and DDP-516, have seen extensive applica- tion over the last 3-1/2 years. The HDC-601 is repackaged to conform to the controller form factor, but the proven logic, direct memory access, printed wiring board layouts, support software, and diagnostic and maintenance documen- tation are retained intact. . ..

2. Available-support software cuts costs and schedules, The HDC-601 computer is software-compatible with the DDP-516 and the extensive software system developed for the DDP-516 is also available for the HDC-601. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 PAGE N0.4_444 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 3. Plated wire memory. The plated-wire memory used 42 in the HDC-601 is rugged in construction and is fast because of its true nondestructive readout characteristics. The contents of the memory are not altered during a readout operation and do not have to be restored as is the case with -*e©re-s. The -contr-oller computer .uses -a 2-mil plated wire memory to take advantage of its greater speed and reliability and lower power consumption. The word-organized structure of the plated-wire memory in conjunction with the nondestruc- tive readout makes possible a convenient means of increasing system reliability by implementing memory lockout. Memory lockout allows that part of memory that contains the oper- ational program and program constants to be operated in a read-only mode, thus preventing the inadvertent alteration of these instructions and constants.

4. Efficient data transfer. The HDC-601 achieves efficient data transfer by providing access to the memory through two routes. One is through the customary direct * input/output processing channel under control of the computer program. The other is a direct memory access channel which permits independent transfer of data into and out of the memory while normal computing operations continue without interruption. The customary direct input/output cycle DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 PAGE NO.A-445 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. requires from 5 to 15 microsecond per input while the HDC-601 42 direct memory address requires only 1 microsecond. Since 120 sensor and 105 analog and digital built-in-test inputs (including spares) must be sampled during each 20,000 msec period, the 4 to 14 microsec per cycle saving through direct memory access 'frees an additional 1000 to 3500 microsec or 5 to 17 percent of each sampling period for other operations. Stated in another way, the 1-microsecond direct memory access makes more than 98 percent of the sampling period available for computations. Direct memory access mode of operation is accomplished on a memory cycle steal basis. That is, -•. requests for access to the memory are granted at the next memory cycle on a priority basis.

5. Real time control. The HDC-601 was designed for real time control and meets the requirements for fast, efficient, and reliable computations. As previously noted,

fc*=r. the HDC-601 is an aerospace version of the Honeywell H-316 and DDP-516 computers, which were designed for and have « established an excellent record in the field of real time control. An important function in a real time control system is the capability to interrupt the normal computations for priority operations without jeopardizing process control. The HDC-601 provides priority interrupts for use by the DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-446 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. controller In (1) processing vehicle commands, (2) detecting 42 power failure and initiating action to preserve the engine * control status, and (3) detecting errors in the output of the msmory.

6. Or>tlnv.-.in word length. The RDC-601 uses a 16-bit word, which is optimum for applications that roust encompass both control and computation functions. While 12-bit word length is sufficient for most control purposes, in certain types of computations such as multiplication, accuracy is degraded unless the slower double precision mode is used. The 16-bit word length in the .HDC-601 provides ample accuracy in the single precision mode for virtually all computations. The double precision operation is still available for the in- frequent operations which demand it. The 16-bit instructional word length is also more efficient in memory addressing capa- bility. The memory may be addressed by the fast direct mode in sectors of 512 words. This size is ample to accommodate the majority of addressing requirements with the fast direct « mode.

! . - 7. Growth capability. The HDC-601 provides growth margin in both memory capacity and computational capability. The memory is organized for optimum cost, size, and weight into planes or increments of 2048 words each. The controller DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4.447 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. uses six planes totaling 12,288 words, providing ample growth 42 allowance beyond the current requirements of 7000 words. This capacity for growth permits the user to capitalize on new functions that may subsequently become needed or desirable. If necessary, the controller memory capacity can be expanded -tro-a-maximum "of 32,768-words. The HDC-601 also has a 30- percent growth margin in computational speed capability since only 14 msec out of each 20 msec sampling period are utilized for computation and built-in test.

Computer Organization Each of the dual redundant.computers in the controller are functionally divided into processor and memory sections as shown in Figure 4.20-15. The processor provides the computer's arithmetic, control, and input/output interfacing capabilities. Interface with the remainder of the system is through the computer interface electronics described in paragraph 4.20.4.2. The memory provides storage for instruc- tions, computational constants, and data from the vehicle and the sensors. Portions of the memory are used as a "scratch pad" to store intermediate computations. The memory system provides a parity bit for each memory word for use in detecting memory system errors. DATE iQ/20/72 THE S INGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-448 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGH/WON. NEW YORK • REP. NO.

REF. /. •> *• • ' •••.-•'•*;• • -—•-.... .

CO."?uTc>. INTERFACE tLECTR:slCS NO. I UCEND

010 010 sG»?LY CLCC* CLOCK 010 010 D."A 0*A • DMA . DMA 010 - DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT OATA C;\T»OL ASSRESS DATA . DATA OrtA - DIRECT KE^OP.Y ACCESS A A A

DIGITAL COMPUTER NO. I

ADDRESS

DATA P.EAO REVEST WRITE DATA HEMORY ACK.SOU1EOCE CONTROL SIGNALS PARITY STATUS

TIKIHG AND CENTRAL CONTROL PROCESSOR COdTP.OL

POW-R FAILURE COSTf.Ol INTERRUPT DEVICE f£A; POV*R RECOVERY HALT EXIT LI'-'E INTERRUPT

Figure 4.20-15 Digital Computer Interface (Typical 1 of 2) DAT!0/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-449 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. The characteristics of the computer are summarized 42 in Table 4.20-12. .A more detailed description may be found in the Honeywell HDC-601 Digital Computer General Description P9-003B (Phase B Supporting Analysis Data, Volume 63).

Central Processor The central processor for the HDC-601 computer employs a parallel-organized data flow structure with conventional organization relative to memory interfacing and instruction execution. Implementation of the logic is accomplished using small and medium scale bi-polar transistor-transistor-logic (TTL) integrated circuits. These circuits have proven reliability backed by substantial field data.

Organization. In its basic functional organization, the central processor can be represented as shown in Figure 4.20-16. Interfaces to the central processor are: 1. Memory interface 2. Direct memory access channel 3. Direct input/output channel 4. Computer clock 5. Interrupt inputs 6. Input discretes.'

All corrsirunication with the central processor is via these

interfaces. THE SINGER COMPANY DAT PAGE N04_45() io/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. 8INGHAMTON. NEW YORK -. - REP. NO.

REF 42

PASA-ETE? CHARACTERISTICS ARITHMETIC PARALLEL 3ISA.RY. T'wO'S CC-PLE.-iST ADDRESSING SIN;LC AC:-.ESS ui7H ISDEXING AND ISDI?,EC7 A::?.iSSI.V5 IN:EX REGISTER 1 HAR^'.ARE l!i'DI-£CT AJ3:£SSIfiG MULTILEVEL LOGIC TtPE TRANSITCR. T.rANSISTCR LOGIC CIRCUITS./ S.".ALL AND MEDIUM SCALE INTEG8ATICM DATA .INSi;T/.0.'JT?.UT CHAViELS -PS.OJS^M CCNTS:LLED A.-;: DIRECT .-EMORY -ACCESS 16 BIT PARALLEL SPEED AID AND SJ3TRACT 2 MICRC3ECCs:s HULTI PLY ^-"l — .-••-> 01 VI IE INSTRVCTICN CO-PLE.-.EN7 57 WORD LE.'iGTH 16 BITS* ISrl/7 DISCRETE 5 16 S7ASOARD ME."C.'.Y CYCLE TlfE •- -REA;/WRITE 1 HICROSEC'iD -ACCESS 350 •IV;CSE;:S:S ME.10SY 12,2:3 '.:?.3s

INPUTS A.'ID OUTPUTS BUFFERED KtCISTERS TVO FiJLL-'-'DRD ARITK1E7IC. CNE

CC'JSLE PRECISION' YES CAPABILITY • INTERRUPTS 13 EXTEfSAL PRIORITY. POWER

•TME PARITY 817 (SIT 17) AND ASS:::A7;2 ?AR|T> CEN-5ATCS AND CETECTIOS IS Hi'CLED AT TrE C-If8 jrER/.-^E.-.CRY INTERFACE.

TABLE 4.20-12 HDC-601 COMPUTER CHARACTERISTICS DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. /. •>

. CLOCK LEGEND INTERRUPT 010 - DIRECT INPUT/ OUTPUT DMA - DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS

POWER >SL'?PLY CONTROL PO'.'cR FAILURE PCWER SUPPLY

Figure 4.20-16 Central Processor Functional Organization (Typical 1 of 2) DAT THE SINGER COMPANY PA IO/20/72 GE N0.4_452 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Data Flow. As shown tn Figure 4.20-16, the data flow 42 between the central processor and memory is through the memory data register with memory address information supplied by the memory address register. From the memory data register, data cen be routed through the adder to any other register. "Tire adder serves both -as -a 'trarrsfer gate and as an arithmetic element during arithmetic operations. Data and information are routed throughout the central processor in accordance with the dictates of the particular instruction being executed. Data is transferred between the central processor ane the system via both the direct input/output channel and the direct . memory access channel.

Control. Execution of instructions is controlled by timing and instruction decoding logic within the central processor, Each instruction is performed in basic steps called microprograms. These microprogram steps include all the basic t^, operations necessary for operation of the central processor. Timing for central processor operations is obtained from a • stable 3-MHz clock, which also supplies timing signals to other points in the system.' The interrupt inputs provide control of the central processor by other parts of the system. DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4.453 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Memory 42 A plated wire memory is used with each redundant computer channel. A functional block diagram of the memory organization is shown in Figure 4.20-17. The package consists of four printed wiring boards containing sense/digit and word/timing elec-tronics, and six-boards forming a memory stack. Each memory board contains its own word select electronics. The two surfaces of each memory board also contain printed wiring interconnections for the electronics plus parallel conductors (word straps) used for word selection. The 2-mil plated wire memory elements are supported in parallel tunnels lying between and at right angles to the word straps on the board surfaces. All boards are securely fastened and supported by a rigid frame. Interconnections are made by flexible flat cable.

Characteristics of the memory are as follows: 1. Capacity: 12,288 x 17-bit words. 2. Cycle Time: 1 microsec (capability to execute any combination of read and write cycles at the « rate of 1 MHz/ 3. Access Time: 350 nanosecond 4. Operating Power: 9 watts average DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO'.4 "4 54 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

PARITY . STATUS V

— p -*"

f*l

EIT DRIVE KE!"ORY 17 DRIVERS ' STACK . - BY 8 —v * ~ 12,288 —t' PREX-.PLIFIERS SANK WORDS (IJ6) SWITCHES -I 17 BITS -> EACH

™^ ~*

-* I "Y" VC?.0 SWITCHES

DATA

Figure 4.20-17 Plated Wire Memory Block Diagram (Typical 1 of 2)

< oo 03 O> DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4_455 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK ' ' REP. NO.

REF. The 2-mil plated wire memory was selected for the 42 controller application over other memory types for the following reasons:

1. Operating speed. The high-speed capability of 2-mil plated wire exceeds that required for the controller applica- tion and provides higher reliability of operation.

2. Low power. Nine watts average power is achieved through power switching the fast switching characteristics of the plated-wire memory element and the nondestructive readout characteristic of plated wire.

3. Minimization of electronics. Two-rail wire can be interfaced directly with standard small- and medium-scale integrated circuits eliminating the need for high current drivers.

4.^- Low volume and weight. Optimization of electronics and use of multilayer printed circuit boards and medium- scale integrated circuits (MSIC's) minimizes volume and weight,

' — — 5. High reliability. High reliability is derived from reliability of plated wire and minimization of electronics.

6. Nondestructive readout.(NDRO). During a read cycle, the memory contents are not altered (nondestructive readout) precluding the need for a"read restore" cycle. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-456

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

7. Lockout capability. By virtue of the "word 42 organized" structure and nondestructive readout operation, • blocks of memory can be electrically disabled to prevent inadvertent alterations of critical instructions and constants. Alternatively, the memory can be energized during ground maintenance operations and altered via a special GSE con- nector. This flexibility is useful for revising the cali- bration constants stored in the memory, following a sensor replacement.

8. Temperature stability. No temperature compensation is required by the 2-mil plated wire memory over the controller operating temperature range.

9. Rup.RCd. vibration-resistant construction.... The plated-wire elements, word straps, and associated electronics are securely supported by a sandwich structure of memory planes and electronics boards mounted in a rigid frame.

Details relative to the selection of the memory are • presented in the Honeywell Controller Technology Trade Study, 970-1327B (Phase B Supporting Analysis Data, Volume 58). DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-457 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 4.20.4.4 OUTPUT ELECTRONICS DESCRIPTION 42 The output electronics (Figures 4.20-18 and 4.20-19) accept digital control commands from computer interface electronics No. 1 converting them to analog voltages for control of servcvalve actuators, on/off controls, and cpark igniters. The output electronics are dual redundant. Each consist of: 1. Output switch and command decoder. 2. On/off controls and igniter drivers to energize engine on-off valves and spark igniters. 3. Servovalve control circuits to energize and position proportional servovalve actuators, and to operate fail-operational and fail-safe solenoids.

Both redundant output electronics channels (A and B) accept digital data from the controlling computer, converting it to orx/pff and analog commands for the engine controls. Channel A energizes the operational torque motors for the proportional valves, and channel B the standby torque motors. Channels A and B each energize half of the redundant outputs. Nonredundant coils on valves are divided between channels A and B. All output commands are fed back to the digital computer to verify the output electronics operation. In addition, the operation of the actuator servovalves is DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-458

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

: '^.&^i:•!'//;•••.•/ Yt%.''.• SS/S/%A

Figure 4.20-18 Output Electronics DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-459 SIMULATION PRODUCTS D VISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF t . 42

•™* * " CU'PdT El£C7f:-UCS_ -

CUTPlTt tLECTP.CNICS CMVilEL A s •

DIO „. 0*TA v. OM/OFF CONTROLS DATA w IGNITERS A.SO SOLENOID VALVES f ^ f £ IGNITER DtlVtRS 0JIPU1 T COMPUTER DIO ., s JITCH I ^ ANALOG ADDRESS " ,'M!> . ,. .,.,. ...-' (' INTERFACE •^ 8UILT-IK TEST ELECTRCNICS HO. 1 DiCCDER 1 F <— -> SERVOACTUATORS fa-ttf, ^ SEP.VOVALVE lx •J.J J fp^fp^^ CIRCUITS -}"~ CONTROL •-•. ~\ FAIL INDICATE »*] OUTPUT ELECTRONICS J J J DIGITAL < ft BUILT-IN TEST L_ « OU7P UT ELECTRCNICS CHANNEL B

DATA CN/Orr CONTROLS K j. IGNITERS AND DIO J »• '* SOLENOID VALVES _ i DATA ( ^ ICHITcR DRIVERS OUTPUT I SWITCH I » ANALOG COWUTER V. K ^ BUILT-IN TEST INTERFACE DtO J •>- COW.ANO ELECTRONICS AODRESS DECODER 1

KO. 2 J > SERVOACTUATORS COHTRO' ^ SEI-'OVALVE < } COHTRO.^ ______CCI_7.,L CiacuiT$ - >• ^. »• . } FAIL INDICATE ~'*J OUTPUT ELECTRONTCS DIGIT/I. } J J .TEST ^

Figure 4.20-19 Output Electronics Organization DATElO/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-460 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. compared to an electronic model. If an unacceptable error 42 or failure is detected in one of the dual servovalves, the channel is disabled by removing power. If the second servo- valve fails, the associated actuator is hydraulically locked in its last position to maintain engine operation.

Output Switch and Command Decoder Digital engine coiranands are presented at the outputs of No. 1 and No. 2 computer interface.electronics in 16-bit parallel format. The output switch and command decoder, Figure 4.20-20, is controlled by computer No. 1 watchdog timer. The watchdog timer output logical one enables 18 AND gates to transfer 16 bits of direct output data frocn computer interface electronics No. 1 into a storage register. The 17th and 18th bits control enable signals from the computer direct input/output address bus to the storage register and the command decoder.

If the watchdog timer output switches to zero signify- ing a failure in computer No. 1, the first set of AND gates will be disabled and a second set enabled transferring the output of computer No. 2 to the storage register. THE SI.NGER COMPANY DAT110/20/72 PAGE N0.4.461 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. B1NGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF.

OUTPUT SWITCH ANC CC.MTANO CECCCCR CHANNEL A

CONTROL BIT 1

COMPUTER INTERFACE DATA ON/CFF -ELECTRONICS CONTROLS AS3 NO. I ,IGNITER DRIVERS DIO CATA AND StRVOVA'.VE COSTSOL CIRCUITS

CCVUCL OS/OFF CCNTRCLS AND IGNITER DRIVERS DIO DATA COMPUTED ^ CCtlTRQL IKTE?.FACE ELECTr.CSICS NO.*? "^^SESVCVALVE CCNTSOL • HW,I,.-,, CIRCUITS ENASLEll C"_J

COMPUTE?. ISTE'FACE

: ELECTRONICS NO.1 DIGITAL DIGITAL BUILT-IN „ TEST TEST ENASLE 2.

DIO AOO'.ESS CJ-P'JTE* INTERFACE ELECTRONICS NO.2

Figure 20-20 Output Switch and Command Decoder (Typical 1 of 2) DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. While the digital data is in the storage register, it 42 is fed back to the digital computer built-in-test inputs for verification. Lack of verification will initiate a new command from the computer. Repeated nonverification (3 times) is a failure.

When the data in the storage register is verified, 12 bits are available to the on/off controls and igniter drivers and to the servoval\>e control circuits. The remain- ing 4 bits are decoded in the command decoder and used to control the sequencing, routing, and timing of the output signals.

When the controller has verified commands for the igniters and on/off controls in the output switch storage register, all 12 bits are clocked by a second enable signal and routed by the command decoder into the register for the on/off controls and igniter drivers, Figure 4.20-21. The appropriate "on" or "off" inputs are then enabled to the 12 drivers to set the controls for the command. Under software control the register maintains the initially commanded output to each driver until a change is commanded, i.e., to reduce solenoid power to the hold-in level or to energize or de-energize a specific solenoid. The driver outputs are checked periodically by built-in-test. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-463 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

1 ^ . GK/OrF CC'II =.3LS ANB ICMITER DRIVERS CHANNEL A .

EIT 1 •k. *» 81'T 2 V >i 0 CUT PUT DATA 0 OH/OFF o o o CXIVEP. IGNITERS (3) OUTPUT SWITCH o CC.NT'.IIS o . CIRCUITS -> . AND PESISTE* AMD BIT 12 V (1 OF 12) SOLENOID VALVES (3) CECODtR (U BITS) COHTROt- 01/OFI CKT?.OL 1 fc- A>:0 I IC.SITE DRIVERS j J Did L BUILT-IN <~ ... .- TEST

Figure 4.20-21 On-Off Controls and Igniters and Drivers (Typical 1 of 2) DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-464 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Actuator Servoyalyg. Operation. 42 Each proportional valve actuator is driven by two servovalves. One is normally in control and is energized by output electronics,Channel: A.

The second is energized by Channel B., but is in standby, Actuator control is transferred to the standby servovalve when either servovalve fail-operational solenoid is energized. When both fail-safe solenoids are de-energized, the actuator is hydraiilically locked in its last position.

Servovalve Control Circuits Verified proportional valve commands in 12-bit digital format are transferred by the command decoder from the output switch storage register to the servovalve command register, Figure 4.20-22.. Once every 20 msec the command for each proportional valve is converted to an analog voltage by the *-.-.. digital-to-analog converter and clocked into one of the five sample and hold circuits. Multiplexing these signals one at a time eliminates the need for four additional sets of ^storage registers and digital-to-analog converters. ,«

The sample and hold analog voltage proportional to the commanded valve position is summed in the driver input

circuit with the demodulated actuator position feedback DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-465 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

DATA

ANALOG BUILT-IN TEST

O'/TPUT SWITCH CONTROL PCSITIC.4 SERVO- ' COr.".ANO VALVE DECCOER CONTROL SERVC-ACTUATCR CIRCUITS TORQUE KOTO?.

ANALOG BUILT-IN TEST

DIGITAL BUILT-IN SERVCACTUATCft ' TEST SPOOL POSITION

SERVOACTl'ATCR FAIL-OPERATIONAL COIL SERVOACT'jATOR FAIL-SAFE COIL FAIL INDICATE REDUNDANT CHANNEL

Figure 4.20-22 Servovalve Control Circuit (Typical 1 of 2) DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. .

REF. 42 signal;from a linear variable differential transformer (LVDT). The resulting error signal drives the servovalve torque motor until the actuator reaches its commanded position and the error signal is a null.

The analog command from each sample and hold circuit is also summed with the demodulated actuator position feedback signal in a servo valve model and comparator circuit. The resultant error signal is the same as that seen by the servo- valve and is applied to an electronic model of the servovalve. The electronic model output is dynamically compared with .demodulated LVDT feedback signal representing the servovalve second stage spool position. When either electronic model (Channel A or B) indicates a servovalve is not following its command signal, a fail indicate signal is generated in the logic unit. The logic unit then esergizes or de-energizes the servoactuator fail-operational or fail-safe coils per the following logic.

CHANNEL CHANNEL STATUS SERVOACTUATOR COIL IN CONTROL A B. Fail-operational, Fail-safe volts • volts OK OK 0 28 A OK Fail 0 28 A Fail OK 28 28 B Momentary Fail Fail Not.applicable 0 Hydraulic Lock DA THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. I&/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-467 : REV. - - BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 4.20.4.5 POWER SUPPLY ELECTRONICS DESCRIPTION 42 The power supply electronics (Figure 4.20-23) rectify, filter, and regulate 115 volt, 3-phase, 400 Hz for use in the engine controls. Dual redundant power supply electronics energized from redundant vehicle power buses maintain the 'required "fafi±-'operatlonal, -fail—safe capability. Redundancy in the regulators matches that of the electronics functional subsystems. Protection is provided against propagation of overload failures. The power supply electronics include provisions for detecting and reacting to out of tolerance voltage, power failure and power recovery.

Power Supply Redundancy Each of the two redundant power supplies consists of line filter transformer with multiple secondary windings and associated rectifiers, and a family of voltage regulators. As shown in Figure 4.20-24, each load branch iscsupplied %as" from the redundant vehicle power buses through separate regulators. Uninterrupted power will be maintained to each « load in the event of a failure in a power bus, rectifier or regulator. A minimum of two regulator failures to the same load are necessary to shut down a computational channel. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 4_468 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 CONTROL DATA SENSORS BUS IGNITERS

LIMIT ON/OFF SENSORS r-T CONTROLS VF'IICLE/ENGINE INFLIGHT DATA BUS 'DAi'A ' ' INTERFACE - ACTUATORS SENSORS JL

COMPUTER «—.-—.' -T--r-_nL- -.'I Uv V INPUT INTERFACE OUTPUT { 1 ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS { J

\ r

DIGITAL COMPUTER

POWER SUPPLY ELECTRONICS

POWER BUS

Figure 4.20-23 Power Supply Electronics DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-469 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

.L .. ___ *•" IIS'/ ) I %.J ViO H 1 FILTER »-, Tf.As;rC?«ER BUS I f-

LOAD CKANNtl A

VOLTAGE MONITOR

115V 3« tOO Kz BUS 2

LOAD CHANNEL B

VOLTAGE MONITOR

Figure 4.20-24 Typical Power Supply Redundancy DATE , THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. in/?o/7? SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-470

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 The redundancy if protected from propagation of overload failure by foldback limiting incorporated in each regulator. If load current exceeds an acceptable level, the foldback limiter will isolate the load until the overload is removed. This feature protects the primary supplies and the remaining functions dependent upon them.

Power supply and regulator redundancy is shown in greater detail in Figure 4.20-25. The two sets of power supply elec- tronics, No. 1 and No. 2, are dedicated to the corresponding computers and computer interface electronics. In addition, each of the three input electronics data channels and the two output electronics data channels are supplied from separate regulators to preserve their redundancy. This also provides a selective turn off capability if an out-of-tolerance condi- tion arises.

*.>•-. Power Supply Electronics Design Each set of power supply electronics, Figure 4.20-25, incorporates radio frequency interference filtering (not shown), multiple transformer secondaries,, and 3-phase, full- wave rectifiers with combination passive and active filter- ing. Redundant 28-volt regulators in each of the two power supplies independently supply power to both digital computers. The 28 volt regulators also supply power to the randem 5 volt ~~}..f . . • f f ?.Ei'JLATC* A.SJ P».ZCI'$i::i SC'.?:E HO. 5 -_*»»*= f""-' *-.-' i .•. - : J 1 It' t H -i;.LA70A A?.: rv.icisics SC^.CE »•:.<• L-LT\ r^- J — . — L_ - . ifW>r»/79 u • !_. L . f f .^;::A:;A P.-.J ?SECisi:.-i sc^.cc KO.J 1U/2U//Z Ife:!" Vj_ I

' ^fe 1 ' ------I-,1 ..;'."! • ... i R£:uUTC', A.N; f.^;:)sics SOJ^E hO.i

~t i~t~ ^ (-15 VO'.T) -15 VCLT -T-1

(-12 VS'.I) * *" h! i • ,1 !'«-• j i ^ (*12 VCLT) .., -12 VCLT J !>'1-"'" A-PLKIEX i k i ' 1 ..-._> • f • 1-1" i:.-.! T\ fJ 1 r i L i ; • ' > .• - ' i r— r -i • (*'5«iT) J 1 -1 1: i

' •'• "• j Llf.S^.t VAKInSLt UUftlMHIIAL S^JM.6 H'J.t 1 : 1 -• • • •- . h II ' . • -»ininl-n -<-rr rn ••- ri» £' -r- 1 I i i 1 1 l'-~ r ••••--- 1 f 1 "*.•. LISL^R VA?.IAsi.E OlfriRtKTIAL SOoRCi KO.l -»-j [

L l 1 «3_ _«, , ___"": .._.

I 1 | "* J

f \ \ IQ ! 1 ' i" 1 1 1 r, i •• \ 1 in L._ _j | — , ,I(-ISVCLT) }

W 1 F:'*:H SuPrLV £L£CTRCHICS OI5ITAL COMPUTER NO. 2

fCVES S'JPPLY £L£CTS:,NICS CIGITAL CCc.P'vTER KO.I

!" • »5 VOLT

i« '

,

POUER .5 VOLT CONVERTER REGULATOR L

*3 VOLT fELfCT- ,IC5 SO. 2 1 "* RE;ULAT:R • .-.-vTf* IhTI'.fACE - V.ECT^CSICS KO.l

A\ F igure 4.20^25 Power Supply Electronics F-."' -'n* *"»-'»'r>

• ' i " yJ-:l^ OUTPUT u£ci*.3Nics

CUlfUT -T R£:.'.AT;> I.SPUT EIECTRS.SICS Cr^>

13 A>0 J3 INPUT ELECT?.CNICS CKAKSEL »A ANO

--f'JtATO?.

RECULATC* H B

veu . 2

._L I—

i'oit f.£;'JLAr:

L- +5 VOLT LAT:* SO.

*5 VCLT 'tO'.'.^Te* NO. I

___ 1 WITH FOi.:=ACK ll.-.ITfs: (TY?) TPJiH3FO?.f.tS AhO RiCTIFItR

US VOLT 3 PHASE 400 HERTZ BUS NO.l

115 VOLT 3 PRASE 4:0 hERT "BUS K0.2 DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4.472 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 regulators for the input electronics, eliminating an addition- al regulator in each supply. The digital computer power is obtained from a dc to dc converter to provide isolation and to preserve the existing circuit and logic design of the HDC-601 computer. ,

Redundant regulators provide +15 volts, +5 volts, and -20 volts for the input and output electronics. Separate +28 volt regulators supply the solenoid valves. The power supply electronics for each input and output electronics channel includes a precision dc reference source for the analbg-to-digital and digital-to-ahalog converters, and the temperature and pressure sensors. Also included is a precision ac reference source for the linear variable differential transformers. The power supplies use both series and switch- ing type regulators. The choice is dictated primarily by efficiency considerations, with the aim of minimizing internal power supply dissipation. The 28 volt regulators with their high and variable current loads and the high-current, 5 volt regulators are of the switching type with noise suppression.

Each power supply branch includes provisions to monitor the voltage levels and to shut down the branch if high out- of-tolerance voltages ate experienced. Power shut down DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-&7T

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 capability is also controlled by the watchdog timers and by the digital computers.

Simultaneous loss of power on both input power buses for more than a few milliseconds will force the controller -fctttro ^an^iivaefrive-'standby ^condition. -If-power is restored on one of the buses within 50 msec, normal operation will resume. If not, a safe engine shutdown will be initiated.

The power supply electronics for the digiral computer include a power failure and recovery interrupt circuit. Figure 4.20-26. This circuit initiates a computer interrupt * to store all critical computation parameters before shutdown, enabling a successful reinitiation of the computer program upon power recovery. The interrupt is initiated by over voltage, under voltage, or loss of power either due to power bus failure or to an intentional shutdown by the watchdog

timer.

As shown in Figure 4.20-27, the .energy stored in the power supplies will sustain computer operation for a minimum j i of 125 microsec after power interruption. This is more than i adequate time for the computer to perform an orderly and safe shutdown. When power recovery occurs and the supply voltages THE SI.NGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 4.474 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF.

WATCHOO1: TAR CQIT^SL G/E'.-VOCTASE DETECTOR Tlf.ER fAIL .. -CENTRAL • PROCESSOR

+5 VCLT MEMORY REGULATOR

-6 VCIT PECULATOR

POWER 28 VOLTS POWER FAILURE CONVERTER POVER INTERRUPT POWER RECOVERY CIRCUITRY POWER RECOVERY INTERRUPT I +? VCLT MEMORY C S> RECL'LATCR i OVEVUNOER ._,._, fa VOLTAGE DETECTORS r&n tnvniat

!H

Figure 4.20-26 Processor Power Failure Detection

03 Cn 01 DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-475 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

,, ALL VOLTAGES STA3LE AMD WITHIN LIXITS -

CPERAT IK: VOLTAGE THAT LOVER OPERATING LIMIT DROPS FIRST

SEC MlMlhUN 'II

DIGIT CURRENT WRITE VOLTAGES ARE VOLTaGE (+SV) UP SiJFFIC IsNTLY TO .CAUSE J!ATA AL.URAT.IO.V.. 125PSEC 1 (iSEC HINIH.'J- MIKiMij.1 '12 SEC MINIH.'JM >2.S VOLTS POWER FAILURE INTERRUPT

j-*— 1 MSEC MIHIKiM

L_ 1 MSEC MIH •^ >2.6 VOLTS

PCVER RECOVERY INTERRUPT

POVCR FAILURE TIMING POWER RECOVERY TIMING

Figure 4.20-27 Power Detection Timing Requirements DAT!0/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-476 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 stabilize, the power recovery circuit generates an interrupt to resume normal computer operation.

Power Requirements The total electrical power required by the engine is a •maximum'of "560-vatts "during'Steady'State-conditions and 870 watts for 3.5 seconds during engine start. Of the 560 watts total required during steady state conditions, 443 watts are dissipated in the controller and 117 watts are dissipated in valves and sensors. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-477 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF 42 ' 4.20.5 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE The selected avionics approach incorporates two general- purpose Honeywell HDC-601 digital computers packaged within each of the three main engine controllers. The computers can be fully reprogramraed to solve any computational problem within the hardware limitations of word length, processing speed, and memory capacity. Each computer has its own program stored within its 2-mil plated-wire computer memory. The programs may easily be changed by using a portable memory loader. The memory loader interfaces with the controller .through ground support equipment electrical connectors on - the controller. The memory loader obtains the program infor- mation from a punched tape, which it encodes into electronic information to be stored in the computer memories. The memory loader also checks the computer program against the punched tape after it is read into the computer memory to ensure that no errors have been introduced into the program.

i ' ' The capability of easily changing the programs stored in the controller computer memories provides a flexibility to accommodate normal development changes quickly, safely, and at low cost. The approach to developing the flight program for the controller is to one main program, called the executive program, and several special purpose subprograms. DATElO/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-478 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

KEF. 42 The individual subprograms perform special numerical computations on data or make logical decisions (e.g., igniter checkout, start preparation, or start). The executive program has the primary task of supervising the sequence of processing subprograms when needed and for keeping track of the total status of the engine, avionics and commands from the vehicle.

The HDC-601 has a fully developed standard software programming library consisting of: 1. DAP-16 Assembler 2. FORTRAN IV Compiler 3. Standard Input/Output Library 4. Mathematical Library 5. Utility Routines

4.20.5.1 CONTROLLER EXECUTIVE PROGRAM The executive program establishes the sequence of oper- t*.-. ations to be performed by the digital computer. Operation of the executive program is cyclic. A complete cycle (one • pass through the executive program) is completed every 20 milliseconds. Figure 4.20-28 is a simplified flow chart of the executive program. Under normal operation, whether on the ground for checkout or during flight, the computer pro- gresses through the executive program, performing the indicated operations in an endless loop. The loop is broken and the DATE . THE SINGER COMPANY PA GE NO. 4-479 lU/ZU//«£ SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTCN. NEW YORK RE P. NO.

' ( RESET J • ' ' REF. 42 'i INITIALIZE PROCESSOR 4 •' •

• IHTE=.fi.'?T J V r>JW '/.Ut ' "* WAIT FOR TIME i "*" INTERRUPT SET TMi LECEN9 INTERRUPT *; -| FOR 20 *. - -t "\ TERMINAL POINT * MILLISECCXDS T -w '» PROCESS CATA ( _y 'OF "PROGRAM ' FOR VEHICLE "^ ' CONTROLLER SELF TEST PROCESS SENSOR / ' / DECISION DATA "^ NO / PApid< 1 ^'-. t PROCESSING GRCUP H " 7 #: RESET WATCHDOG OF INSTRUCTIONS 1 YES * TIMER HO. A v ENGINE PWSE\NO t (IK PROCESS / * UPDATE PHASE a C PARITY £ = R03^\ m TABLE • \^INTER'.U?T _y 4 .1 t ' PERFORM T UPDATE ENGINE STATUS BYTE U r WATCH OOG- "\ \^ TIMER FAIL ^/ i - / k 4 "°/ TA" N VE$ ^ ' ENfi iNE \ v-$ ( LIU IT y ^ .

NO NO/ VEHICLE \ " t CHANGE PHASE \ CONCUR / ^ 10 SKUIUOVH >*

•> ~:

»T . • 17 • NO/ ENGINE \ YES \ REA3INESS /

i f RETURN fRSH 5^'1'" \ NO . *-**/ ACTUATOR ~^v N0 ^ COMMANO INTERRUPT ") f CKASSELS / \. ctl-ts;itL _J ^ K Yts . r — \ NwOu / $?M50R \ \ CHANNEL / YES TURN OFF » 1 C> WATCHDOG TIMERS ^f ACTUATOR P.ES'JSCAHCT^X i ^V^AILU^i IKTtRRUPT J i HALT «• ^f - , -'' \ t SWITCH SWITCH OUT RE3'J>i 3ANT »' - 1 • ACTUATOR SENSOR CCMPO «ENT

TU°N CfF COMPUTER POWER " ^ ' X' v "" " " i . .

Figure 4.20-28 Major Cycle Executive Program DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-480 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 sequence of operations is revised by any one of several possible events: • 1. Command received from vehicle alters control or checkout phase of operation. 2. Built-in test determines component failure. 3. Engine limit detection monitor determines engine exceeded allowable limits. The executive program contains the logic to evaluate all of the three events listed, update the engine status byte and phase table stored in computer memory, and change the sub- programs to.be processed by the computer.

As indicated in Figure 4.20-28, by the five terminal points, the executive program may be entered from several points with different external conditions. The start of the executive program cycle during ground operation begins with application of power to the controller which resets and initializes the computer. This inhibits controller outputs during the transition to full electrical power and forces - « the executive program to start from a predetermined memory

i location. The engine status byte and phase tables are set to the initiation condition. A controller self-test is pro- cessed each cycle. Successful completion of the controller self-test is required prior to performing a subprogram of DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 PAGE N0.4_481 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. . . BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 engine operation. The logical decision"engine phase in process" is processed by the executive program to determine which subprogram, listed in Table 4.20-13, is to be processed. A failure detected during controller self-test or engine phase subprogram processing is evaluated and corrective action taken as irfd'ic'ated. "Exceeding *an 'engine limit condition will result in an engine shutdown only if the vehicle will permit a shut- down. The engine status byte and phase tables are updated each cycle to indicate current engine status and engine sequencing phase.

One watchdog timer is reset each time through the executive program cycle. Sensor data which does not require executive program control to be processed into memory are validated, redundancy verified, and parameter values averaged in the block "process sensor data". Maintenance data for vehicle recording is processed intthe block process data for vehicle. This completes the major executive cycle in less than 20 msec. The executive program then waits for the ' • computer real time counter to signal a time interrupt to repeat the cycle.— .___..._ — _.. ._

The executive program cycle may be interrupted in any part of the repetitive cycle by interrupts generated by built- in test within the controller or by vehicle command interrupts. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY ' PAGE NO . 46482 SI Ml II AT ION PRODUCTS DIVISION!

REV. . - BINGHAMTON. NEW. YORK . REP. NO

REF. TABLE 4.20-13 SUBPROGRAM

4^ 2fm SUBPROGRAMS . — . . • - - 1. AUTOMATIC CHECKOUT A. MEMORY SUM CHECK B. PRESSURE SENSORS CALIBRATION CHECK C. YTEMPERATURE SENSOR FUNCTIONAL CHECK D. FLOW/SPEED SENSOR FUNCTIONAL CHECK E. VIBRATION SENSOR- FUNCTIONAL CHECK ' •*F. -SPARK IGNITER FUNCTIONAL -CHECK G. ACTUATOR /VALVE FUNCTIONAL CHECK H. PNEUMATIC SHUTDOWN TEST I. EMERGENCY BOOST MODE LIMIT SHUTDOWN CONTROL FUNCTIONAL CHECK J. EXTENDABLE NOZZLE FUNCTIONAL CHECK

2. START PREPARATION A. GN2 PURGE B. INTERMEDIATE SEAL PURGE C. HELIUM FUEL SYSTEM PURGE 8. PROPELLANT RECIRCULATION - •' ' - E. HELIUM FUEL SYSTEM PURGE: PROPELLANTS DROPPED

3. FLIGHT A. START B. MAINSTAGE C. SHUTDOWN

4. POST-SHUTDOWN A. PROPELLANT DUMP (1) LIQUID OXYGEN DUMP (2) FUEL DUMP

, - - - B. ABORT TURNAROUND BOOSTER (1) HELIUM FUEL SYSTEM PURGE (2) PROPELLANT RECIRCULATION

1 i '_ ^ ' ' - - . _ . . •

. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N0.4_483 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 Memory parity, watchdog timers, actuator redundancy failure, and loss of electrical power initiate interrupts by hardware built-in test within the controller. A loss of power results in a power interrupt which causes computational operation to stop for the duration of the failure. If power is restored, a power recovery interrupt is generated which starts the executive program at the "initiate major cycle" block. This is different from normal power startup because the computer memory still retains all data processed prior to the interrupt, including engine status byte and phase tables. Thus, if the power failure is not too long (less than 50 milliseconds), normal control may be resumed.

Parity error or watchdog timer failure are failures of a controller channel and cause control to switch to the redundant operational channel. They generate interrupts, which turn off both watchdog timers for the failed channel, command the failed computer channel to HALT processing, and turn off power to the failed computer". Power can be restored — to the failed channel only by cycling the reset. Nornally, this is not done until the flight is ended and the controller is being checked out. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-434 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Vehicle command or data requests are input to the 42 vehicle at any time and interrupt the executive program for processing, as illustrated in Figure 4.20-29. The executive program resumes control upon completion of the processing and implements the command or request for data.

The six engine mission phases are: (1) checkout, (2) start preparation, (3) start, (4) mainstage, (5) shutdown, and (6) post-shutdown. Subprograms common to engine phases are not duplicated for each phase, which conserves memory. The executive program determines entry and exit points for linking programs together. The subprograms are expanded and - described in detail in later sections. For the three flight phases (start, mainstage and shutdown), all computations in the subprograms assocaited with each phase are accomplished each major cycle. The remaining phases each require multiple cycles to complete the required operations. For example, the «a«» automatic checkout subprogram may command an actuator to move. It will verify the motion on later major cycles, giving time

! • « - for the actuator to respond.

Inputting sensor data into memory is not a function of the executive program, but is under control of the direct memory access. This requires no processor time; however, the direct-memory access sequence may be altered by the executive program. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-485 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

APPLICABLE \YES WITH PHASE

Figure 4.20-29 Vehicle Command Interrupt DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4_486 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 4.20.5.2 CONTROLLER SELF-TEST The controller self-test program (Figure 4.20-30) is executed during each cycle through the executive program. It verifies the status of all controller components except for some of the low-level multiplexer switches, vibration sensor input amplifiers, and position sensor input demodu- lators. Those components are checked as part of the sensor input tests.

The individual controller subsections are tested in sequential fashion, as shown in Figure 4.20-30. If a compo- nent failure which does not impair the operability of the controller is detected, the failure is indicated to the executive and the program returns to the next step normally performed in the test sequence. If a failure occurs which results in an inoperative controller channel, the controller self-test program indicates the failure to the executive and transfers control to the executive for the processing of channel shutdown, indicated in Figure 4.20-28.

4.20.5.3 AUTOMATIC GROUND CHECKOUT Upon receiving a checkout command via the vehicle data bus, the executive program selects the automatic ground checkout mode. Since the controller self-test has been per- formed as a part of each pass through the executive program, DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-487 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. c ENTER FROM .EUCVTIVS IMTER FROiM EXECUTIVE REAL-TIKE CLOCK TEST MEMORY SUN CHECK

PASS 1 PASS

PROCESSOR TEST PRESSURE SENSOR 20 PERCENT AND "80 PERCENT CALIBRATION CHECK PASS PASS KEHORY ELECTRONICS TEST TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUNCTIONAL CHECK

PASS

PARITY KA?.3VARE TEST VERIFY NO PROPELLAHTS DROPPED PASS PASS DIRECT P£«?.Y ACCESS CONTROL, INP'JT KJLTIPLEXIR ELECTF.jNICS ASD 34TA EUS FLOW/SPEED SENSOR FUNCTIONAL CHECK HJLTIFLEXER ELECTRONICS TEST IPASS PASS 1 VURATION SENSOR FUNCTIONAL CHECK

WATCHDOG TIMER TEST PASS

PASS SPARK IGNITER FUNCTIONAL CHECK

I INPUT ELECTRONICS TEST PASS

PASS ASALOG TO DIGITAL VERIFY HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE CONVERTER CALIBRATION PASS 1PASS ACTUATOR/VALVE FUNCTIONAL CHECK OUTPUT ELECTRONICS TEST PASS PASS

PKEUKATIC SHUTOO.N TEST R S!J??LY ELECTRONICS TEST PASS PASS

EMERGENCY 3:OST KCDE LIMIT SKUTCOW INDICATE STATUS CONTROL FUNCTIONAL CHECK t TO EXECUTIVE FAIL PASS

FAIL RESET VATCH30S INDICATE STATUS TO EXECUTIVE TIMER NO. B I C RETURN TO EX-CUT IVE C RETURN TO EXECUTIVE Figure 4.20-30 Figure 4.20-31 Controller Self Test Automatic Ground Checkout DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-488 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 the components remaining to be checked include actuators, valves, spark igniters, sensors, and certain sensor inter- face circuits which cannot be completely checked by the controller self-test. An additional memory sum test of the computer memory is also performed as further assurance that the program is valid and that all memory locations can be addressed.

The automatic checkout begins with the memory sum test, as shown in Figure 4.20-31, and continues with a checkout of pressure and temperature sensors. A check is made to ensure V- that no propellants have been dropped before any further checkout is performed. Tests of the remaining components noted above are then made. This includes a verification of all redundancy and fail-safe backup provisions.

Any failure detected in the checkout sequence is iden- «*=*. tified to the executive. If the failure does not prohibit further checkout, the program returns to the checkout sequence

m and completes the tests. Status upon completion of the check- out is indicated to the executive, which in turn processes it for transmittal to the vehicle when requested. DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-489 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 Subprograms which provide a checkout of individual components or types -of components are contained in the com- • puter memory. The propellant and pneumatic valves and extendible nozzle may be individually checked out. The sensors are checked out as a group. The spark igniters are also checked out as a group. 'The flow charts for these component tests are presented in Figures 4.20-32, 4.20-33 and 4.20-34.

The propellant valve, extendible nozzle, and spark igniter test programs contain interlocks to verify that propellants have not been admitted to the engine. Since the executive program verifies the engine's operating mode before calling on a subprogram, no additional interlocks are required for the sensor tests. •

4.20.5.4 START PREPARATION The start preparation phase of engine operation may be entered and sequenced by commands from the vehicle follow- ing successful completion of an enginfe checkout. Four purges are required to condition the engine for start. These include: I 1. GN^rpurge until engine start and helium purge of high-pressure oxidizer turboputnp intermediate seal for approximately 10 minutes prior to dropping propellants. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 EXTER FROM EXECUTIVE j:

VERIFY HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE'

VERIFY P?.C°ELLiSTS HOT AbMITtED TO ESCJSE" T PASS 3'JTPUT CCK-.V.XD TO SELECTED VALVE OS EXTES3IELE NCZZLE

I PASS

VERIFV£

PASS

VERIFY ACTUATOR REOUNOAST STATUS

PASS

FAIL ~ INDICATE STATUS TO EXECUTIVE

c RETURN TO EXECUTIVE

Figure 4.20-32 Propellant Valve/Extendable Nozzle Test DATiOY20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 ENTER ft.M EXECUTIVE

VERIFY PROPELLANTS NOT ADMITTED TO ENGINE

PASS

OUTPUT CCWANOS TO ALL SPARK IGNITERS

VERIFY SPARK PATE AND VOLTAGE

PASS

FAIL INDICATE STATUrTO EXECUTIVE

RETURN TO EXECUTIVE

Figure A.20-33 Igniter Test

C EM7ER FP.OM EXECUTIVE

OUTPUT STIM'JLATIOS COK.1ASOS "TO ALL SENSORS

PASS

VERIFY SENSOR OUTPUTS

PASS

FAIL INDICATE STATUS TO EXECUTIVE

C RETURN TO EXECUTIVE Figure 4.20-34 Sensor Test DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-492 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 2. Helium purge of the fuel system for approximately 42 3 minutes prior to dropping propellants.

3. Propellant recirculation when propellants are dropped, and

4. Helium purge 6f 'the "fuel system repeated for approximately 3 minutes prior to engine start. The time allocated for each purge is controlled by the vehicle. Interlocks in the executive program phase table verify that the sequence is correct and that conditions are acceptable prior to initiating the first purge.

A flow chart of the start preparation phase is shown in Figure 4.20-35/ Each subprogram is designed to be executed for each major cycle.

The first subprograms performed by command from the vehicle^are the nitrogen purge and high-pressure oxidizer turbopump intermediate seal purge. Commands to energize the nitrogen and high-pressure oxidizer turbopump inter- mediate seal solenoids are issued the first time through the subprogram. Correct output command signals and pressure sensor measurements are verified each major cycle of the esecutive program forthe duration of the subprogram. Status is indicated to the executive for evaluation. DATE 10/20/72 T HE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-493 J.U/4U//4 SIMULA T ON PRODUCTS D VISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

ESTER F*:«A ( EXECUTIVE J , I / GN2 PURGE-. \ / \ / \ PROP ELLA STS \

FUEL PVGE / rt$H 1"' j'" 1 i"' " . •< • ES-=GIZE EXERCIZE CE-ESERGIZE ENERGIZE START PrASE INTER-i: IATE MELILS _ HELIIW FUEl HELIUM FUEL PURGE

|

i .1 . i i DE-ENERGIZE ENERGIZE VERIFY . DE-EsEF.GIZE VERIFY 6*2 PURGE OUTPUTS * ISTERr.EOIATE OUTPUTS »" SEAL PURGE I i 1 i 1 OE-EKERGIZE VERIFY VERIFY HELIU* VERIFY HELIUM E.sEP.GIZE HELIUM FUEL 1 FUEL PURGE > OUTPUTS FVEl PL'RGE — k LIFTCFF SEALS PRESSURE PUPGE ;.S5 BLEED VALVES ir PASS 5 O ^_ . i* 1 I i DE-EK5RGIZE VERIFY VERIFY^ I LIFTOFF SEALJ ^ ' PURGE PRESSURE —^ PRGPELLANT fc AND CLOSE ^ VERIFY' START BLEED VALVES * OUTPUTS CONDITIONS 1 L PASS I i VERIFY f i EN-RGIZE INTERMEDIATE i . VERIFY VERIFY SEAL PURGE ^ LIFTOFF PROPELLANT SEAL FUSGE Pf.ESSi.'=.£ j SEAL VALVE P POSITIONS | I

I a VERIFY VERIFY ' OUTPUTS ._ BLEED VALVES fOSITIOHS I VERIFY * INTER.-.ECIATE i SEAL VERIFY PRESSURE •j — GH2 PURGE PRESSURE

t i S~\

"y t RE7URH TO ] ( EXECUTIVE ^/

g Figure 4.20-35 Start Preparation DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-494

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. The helium fuel system purge control command from the vehicle sequences the helium fuel system purge subprogram. A command is issued the first time through the subprogram to energize the helium fuel system purge solenoid. Outputs

to the solenoids and GN2 purge pressure, helium fuel system purge pressure, and intermediate seal purge pressure are verified each major cycle for the remainder of the subprogram.

When propellants are admitted to the engine^ the vehicle issues a propellant recirculation command. This command terminates the helium fuel system purge and high-pressure

i. oxidizer turbopump intermediate seal purge subprograms and initiates the propellant recirculation subprogram. Commands are issued to de-energize the helium fuel system and inter- mediate seal purge solenoids. The GN£ system solenoid remains energized. Additionally, the first time through the subprogram, commands are issued to energize liftoff seals and open bleed

valves. Subsequently, GN2 purge pressure, liftoff seal pressures, fuel and oxidizer bleed valve positions as well as controller output are verified each major cycle for the duration of the subprogram.

The last subprogram of the start preparation is again a helium fuel system purge control commanded by the vehicle and is an addition to.the previous subprogram. A command is DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N04_495 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4RE2F issued the first major cycle to energize the helium fuel system purge solenoid. Outputs to solenoids, GN£ purge pressure, liftoff seal pressures, helium fuel system purge pressure, and bleed valve positions are verified each major cycle for the duration of the subprogram.

In addition, the propellant pressures and temperatures, and propellant valve positions are measured and verified each major cycle. The engine status byte is updated to "engine ready" 3 minutes after the start of this subprogram if propellant conditions are acceptable for starting the engine. The normal exit from -this subprogram is by receiving a start command from the vehicle. Commands are issued to de-energize the GNo purge solenoid, the helium fuel system purge solenoid, the liftoff seal solenoids which also close the bleed valves, and energize the intermediate seal purge solenoid. At least one additional major cycle is required to verify that the intermediate seal purge pressure is within limits prior to completing the start preparation phase. «

4.20.5.5 FLIGHT PROGRAMS > Repeatable.start, mainstage, and shutdown control are implemented with open-loop sequencing of valves, switching to closed-loop thrust control from a thrust level of approxi- mately 10 percent to EPL. Closed-loop mixture ratio control THE SINGER COMPANY DATE 10/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-AQ£ SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGriAMTON. NEW YORK ' REP. NO.

REF 42 is implemented 3.5 seconds after start initiation until shut- down. The flexibility of the digital controller allows modi- fication to the sequence of closed-loop logic with simple software program changes.

..S^art_CQnt.r,ql The executive program initiates the start control sub- program upon receipt of the start command from the vehicle. Three interlocks are provided to ensure proper initiation of start. The engine must be in an "engine ready" status and have received thrust level and mixture ratio command values from the vehicle. The start control, shown in Figure 4.20-36, contains a start sequence timer (software program) to control which program branch is followed until time for the next event, The branches correspond to the phases of start control described previously in Section under Engine Start. Actuator commands^jire computed in the appropriate start control branch, outputted and verified each major cycle. The start sequence timer switches phases as each is completed. Ignition is confirmed at 1 second by verifying that a thrust level of 5 to 15 percent has been achieved. All propellant valves are I closed immediately if ignition is not confirmed. The thrust control loop is closed for mainstage control at 1.7 seconds and the thrust is ramped to the commanded level. The loop THE SINGER COMPANY DATE lQ/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-497 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 ENTER re.o« CEXECUTIVE

T-0 S5C INITIATE STEP TO 0*EN KAIN FUEL'VALVE ON S?A^K ICHITEP.S

INITIATE »^»? ."AIS OXI?IZE? ViLV- TO 55X T-0.I SEC. C?EN F'.'EL ? = Ee."iE»S C.XIOIZ-'. VALVE TO 2* (LIFT SEALS) OPEN CXI3IZER F'-EJ-INER eXIDIZE». VALVE tO 21 (LIFT SEALS)

T-0. 5 INITIATE RAMP TO OPEN FUEL PREBU'P.SER OXIOIZER VALVE TO I2X

T-.1.0 SEC*. CONFIPH IGNITION 5t < ACTUAL THRUST <

r T-1.7 INITIATE CLCSEO LOOP THRUST COMPOTE muST E CONTROL TO CCW-ANDED LEVEL,

T-t.85 SEC. INITIATE S.V-P TO OPEN CSCUHT VALVE TO ICO? AT MINIKU.1 PSVER VERIFY VAL&E LEVEL

T-2.0 SEC, INITIATE P-A«P TO OPEN MAIN OXIDIZES VALVE TO 1COX

CCNFI3H .MINIMUM PDVE?. LEVEL T< 3 SEC I 1 l.'ilTIATE .".AIS57AGE CC-:'JSTIOS I EKGIME LIMIT DETECT L -i^ tCOUNT VA I I

' - COMPUTE MIXTURE P.ATIO J T»3.S ScC. INITIATE CLCSEO LOCP KIXT.', •-"- ji -.-_£^ > EC.UATIOS V.«? TO I, RATIO < \\ CCf.-^NOEO VALVE . |

T-3.5 SEC.. SWITCH TO WUNSTAGZ CCTTR3L INDICATE STATUS FAIL TU.1H OFF 5PASK ISMTERS TO EXECUTIVE

RETL'»J( TO EXECUTIVE T -TIME FRC« JTART COWJWIO < Figure 4.20-36 Start Control THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 4.4g8 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF 42 is closed on mixture ratio control at 3.5 seconds and ramped to the commanded value. Engine limit parameters are monitored each major executive program cycle to ensure safe engine operation throughout the start control. The executive will initiate a shutdown at any time during the start control if an engine limit Is exceeded and limit control is enabled by the vehicle or a shutdown command is received from the vehicle.

Mainstage Control The transition from start to mainstage control is smooth. Closed-loop thrust control is initiated in the start control mode at a 10 percent thrust level. Closed-loop mixture ratio control is initiated at the mixture ratio level present 3.5 seconds after start and ramped to the commanded value. Mainstage control consists of computing and outputting thrust and mixture ratio commands from computed mixture ratio thrust, fuel preburner temperature margin, and oxidizer preburner temperature margin, as illustrated in Figure 4.20-37. Pre- burner temperature control is only applicable if limit control • is enabled by the vehicle. Thrust error is used exclusively to compute the oxidizer preburner oxidizer valve command if limit control is inhibited. The thrust and mixture ratio com- mands from the vehicle are processed immediately. A shutdown willbbe initiated during mainstage control by either an DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-499 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. 8INGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

RET. 42

ENTE H APPLY OYNi.xlC Cir.'ENSATION TO T?3 /^ '. ."-T^j ) _ (S/I.S4) * 1 . V V

* i - ...... _— : : _ r-j i O«PUTE CXIOUER MSS FLOW 1 ^ ROM LOX FLCVKETER. PRESSURE, COMPUTE L n COMPUTE 7EM?EP.ATJRE ERROR A.HO TEMPERATURE i MIXTURE RATIO f > ETP3 " 22°° R ' TCPB i 4 Jw '. ~ i COMPUTE FUEL MASS FLOV F».5« APPLY FEEC5ACK GAIN i MIXTURE PJiTIO Uj . HYCRO:EN FLOVMETER, PRESSURE, CONTROL LCO? i E'TPB " K>8 ETPS ... AND TEMPERATURE * ' . . fi - t .. V V < ^J CC«?yTE FUEL -' 1 COMPUTE OXIDIZE1 PASS FLOW COMPUTE P.ATE AND P.ANCE LIMITED 1 TEhPEPJkTURE yAP.CIN ^J FUEL CASS FLOW TKP.UST CC/.'-ANO (F'e) FROM VEHICLE ThR'jST CC.-..-.A.VO (Fc) r i y i 5 COMPUTE OXIOIZER J 1 ^ ^ N PKE3UP.NER TEMPERATURE « COMPUTE TH?.UST (F) FROM 1 KARC 1 N 1

PCI H*. CUKP COOLANT • j COMPUTE RATE ASO RANGE LIMITED

MIXTURE RATIO CO WAND (H.VC) FRCrt VEHICLE COf.fMO (M.^) S >j COMPOTE THRUST \ APPLY DYNAMIC COMPENSATION TO THRUST (r s + l) i ' r, - -r^-T , rr F - • 1 F _ • T ,S + 1) COMPUTE MIXTURE RATIO ERROR i "" 1 4. i - COMPUTE TH?UST ERROR ' K.I THRUST LOO? I ' *^ CONTROL . I V '

COMPUTE MIXTURE RATIO GAIN

YFitsS f/ LIMI^T \ Xw. a"W i f CCK7XCL y — 1 \ ENABLED / i t 1 i •y . APPLY GAJN TO ERROR 1 ^ MINIUM ERROR SELECT LOGIC ^ • • DETECTION **

1 1 1 1 vy i - i i 1 U VVr i • COMPUTE CP5CV CC"- AND COMPUTE FP50V COMMAND ~ ' " ' (TS * I)- — *- - /^ RETURN TO ^ v . .„.! (K E ) *F S ' 3 FM; 1 EXECUTIVE J

Figure 4.20-37 Mains tage Control DATt THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. iO/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-500

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF engine limit condition with limit control enabled or a 42 shutdown command from the vehicle.

Shutdown Control Normal shutdown control is accomplished by closed-loop control thrust decrease followed by a sequencing of propellant valves closed, as shown in Figure 4.20-38. The closed-loop phase uses the same closed-loop thrust and mixture ratio control subprograms as mainstage control. Normal shutdown control is accomplished upon command from the vehicle or by the executive if an engine limit is exceeded and limit control is enabled. 'The internal thrust reference level determines the entry point of the shutdown phase. Thrust level above MPL initiates a controlled decrease rate of 4800 pounds (21.351 newtons) per 10-msec interval to MPL. Below MPL, a software timer is used to control the sequencing of propel- lant valves closed. The times indicated in Figure 4.20-38 correspond to when that branch is initiated and followed until the next branch is applicable. Valve positions are 1 • monitored each cycle throughout the shutdown subprogram. The executive program automatically initiates retraction of the extendible nozzle 4 seconds after orbiter shutdown. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/7,*.v,,t2. PAGE NO. 4-501 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAf.fTON. NEW YORK REP. NO. -

REF. 42

ENTER FA:* i • ' IECESO ( EXECUTIVE j «PL • HIHir.VH PC'.'CR IEVEL t • TIME FROM K?L Th'.'JST REFERENCE •LEVEL 0* TIME F«0rt S-'JTOOwN CCfHANO BELO'J M?L REFERENCE

' X REFEStfitE /- r » --- - \ ,/

" .... . , '>

t - 0 SEC INITIATE RA.-.P T3 CLSSE fr- • COMPUTE THRUST EQUATION MAIN CXIOIZ£S V-LVi 1 RAnP OECREASE RATE . • AT 1104/SEC SATE « 1 » 1.800 L3/10 MS { 1

- "•- ' . .. - t - 0;3 SEC 1 _ COMPUTE MIXTURE INITIAT; E RA-.P TO CLOS- t- paE2'. *N£* OXIDIZER VALVES K ! RATIO EQUATION AT IjOi./SEC RATE - ""].... .

t < 0 .5 SEC _.. . 1 SCHEDULE COOLANT VALVE- • ~- • - POStTOS AS FUNCTION S YES / ACTUAL TH?.UST \ - 0 t . . OF THSUST LEVEL ANO • ' \- *• MPL . .S / MIXTURE RATIO ..

"' •••"^*

~ " ' IHITIATE PJV«P TO CLOSE » VERIFY VALVE COOIAST VALVE . POSITIONS — . 1 IJ ' 4> t - 0.65 SEC t. INITIATE STEP TO CLOSE INDICATE STATUS ' FAIL ...MAIN FUEL VALVE ^ TO EXECUTIVE -A f RETURN TO .l-— r— ......

Figure 4.20-38 Shutdown Control DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 10/20/72 - SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-502

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4RE2F Post-Shutdown The post-shutdown phase is entered by the executive with the completion of the nozzle retraction. No subprograms are active during this time; only the controller self-test is performed each major cycle. Power may be safely removed from the engine at this time. Two other options are also available. Propellant dumping through the engine for either the booster or orbiter or an abort turnaround may be commanded for the booster if the preceding shutdown was not due to an engine malfunction.

Propellant'"Dumping The executive enters the propellant dump mode of the post-shutdown phase by command from the vehicle. Interlocks are provided by the executive to prohibit opening both fuel and oxidizer valves at the same time. The duration of the mode is controlled by the vehicle. Figure 4.20-39 is a flow chart for the subprogram. Liftoff seals are verified open and bleed Valves closed following the propellant dump mode command from the vehicle. Individual valve commands " from the vehicle are outputted. to the actuators during the appropriate major cycle. An interlock is included to ensure a helium fuel system purge is active for a minimum of 10

seconds following an oxygen dump and prior to a fuel dump. DATE10/20/?2 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N0. \.\} 1 i.\j 1 i t. >UJ SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION -

REV. BfNGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

— ...... ------x EST-?. FR;-M \ EXECUTIVE y *) \YES JI!r/\ •LIQUI --**>D OXfC-• -1* /\ • NO- \> ------'LTFTCrF'ScALS £ I£lX HELIUM FUEL' \* AND CLOSE SYSTE:M« py?.CE y~ ± BLEED VALVES VERIrY Fu£l VALVE CLC:-- D . FUEL DUMP «• VERIFY POSITION f.A!

VERIFY PURGE > 10 SECONDS - VERIFY LIFTOFF "VERIFY q 'OUTPUTS T HELIUM VERIFY ELE-0 VERIFY HELIUM U£L SYSTEM PURGE VALVE POSITIONS FUEL P'JRGE PRESSURE

POSITIOM HAIK FUEL VALVE PASS.._ VERIFY OUTPUTS

J, VERIFY HELIUM FUEL PURGE-PRESSURE VERIFY HYD.^AL'LIC ) SYSTEM PRESSURE

- VERIFY VALVE POSITICSS

FAIL INDICATE S'ATUS FAIL yp TO EXECUTIVE

RETo'S.N TO i ( EXECUTIVE J ^

Figure 4.20-39 Post-Shutdown Propellant Dumping DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO .4. 504 - SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 Following the closing of the main fuel valve, the sequence is complete.

Abort Turnaround The executive may be commanded to enter an abort turn- around .mode .o.f .the post-shutdown .phase by command from the vehicle. This applies to a booster only if the abort was not due to an engine system malfunction. The sequencing of the mode is controlled by the vehicle, resulting in an engine-ready condition approximately 5 minutes following the shutdown, A flow chart of the subprogram is shown in Figure 4.20-40 and is similar to subprograms of the start preparation phase. Each subprogram is designed to be executed each major cycle.

The first subprogram performed by command from the vehicle is the helium fuel system purge. Commands to energize the helium fuel system intermediate seal, and GN2 solenoids are issued the first time through the subprogram. Correct output signals and pressure sensor measurements are verified each major cycle for the duration of the subprogram, and any failure detected will be indicated to the executive for .« evaluation.

The propellant recirculation command from the vehicle sequences to the propellant recirculation subprogram, which THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE N0.4.5()5 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. f EHTE* FROM mcurrvf j 42

" i q t ' * YES HELIUM FUEL SYSTEM PURGE

PRO?ELLA«T • N. S. RECUCULATIOH S ENif-.GIZE C.N PURGE *

•'VERIFY "ALL ^TlttSOPUMPS STOPPED START PHASE COM.-ASO ENERGIZE HELJL'M FUEL SYSTEM Pl'».CE — • ^ ( ...--.. J. . ENERGIZE LIFTOFF DE-ENERGIZE SEALS AND BLEED VALVES GKj PURGE — ENERGIZE INTERMEDIATE SEAL PURSE I I

DE-ENERGIZE HELIUM VERIFY OUTPUTS FUEL SYSTEM PURSE . VERIFY OUTPUTS I .._ _ 1' ' ~ "•" 1 -4,

VERIFY LIFTOFF ' ... . DE-ENERGIZE LIFTOFF SEAL PRESSURE SEALS AHD BLEED VALVES

VERIFY HY3!UULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE i i VERIFY BLEED j^; VERIFY OUTPUTS VALVE POSITIONS

VERIFY Mj PURGE PRESSURE i i

VERIFY PRCPELLAMT VERIFY INTERMEDIATE _.. START. CCNDITIO.XS . „ SEAL PURSE PRESSURE

VERIFY HHIl'K FUEL ' " SYSTEM PUS.SE PRESSURE I i VERIFY PP,C?ELLAXT * VERIFY HYDRAULIC '* "v VALVE POSITIONS SYSTEM PRESSURE VERIFY IXTEWiDIATE SEAL PU'GE F?.£SSUR£

; 4 PASS PASS

|'

FAIL INDICATE STATUS FAR TO EXECUTIVE

c HETUR.M TO EXECUTIVZ Figure 4.20-40 Post-Shutdown Abort Turnaround DATE THE SINGER COMPANY 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION PAGE™. 4_5Q6

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 is an addition to the previous one, and a command is issued to energize the liftoff seals and open the bleed valves. • Liftoff seal pressure measurements and bleed valve positions are verified each major cycle of the subprogram. In addition, propellant conditions and propellant valve positions are verified each major cycle. TSng'ine status is updated to engine- ready 3 minutes after propellant recirculation commences if propellant conditions are satisfactory for engine start.

The mode is exited when a start command is received from the vehicle. Solenoids for the helium fuel system, GN2 purge, and propellant recirculation are de-energized. Outputs, intermediate seal pressure, and hydraulic pressure are veri- fied prior to transferring to the start phase.

Power Off A reset command is required from the vehicle prior to removing engine power. The purpose of the reset is for the executive to differentiate removal of power and a power transient. The phase table and status byte are cleared by the executive with a reset command. Following a power recovery, the executive examines the phase table and determines the correct engine operating phase to return to. DAT£0/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-507 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 4.20.5.6 SENSOR DATA Reading of sensor data into memory is sequenced and controlled by direct memory access on a cycle-stealing basis from the processor. Each direct memory access cycle interrupts processing for one memory cycle time (1 microsecond) to directly 'insert or 'extract 'data •to'/from-memory without dis- turbing computations. Sensor values are computed from raw data and calibration constants stored in memory. Temperature equations are second order and pressure equations first order. After the sensor equations have been calculated, the sensor values are voted and averaged to determine a parameter value . which is used in the computational equations and engine limit detection. Figure 4.20-41 is a flow chart illustrating sensor voting and averaging. Each sensor is individually tested and the differences computed. If the differences are within limits, the average value is stored as the parameter value. The subprogram is repeated each major cycle for each parameter except sensors which are for flight maintenance recordings only. - . • DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N°-A_cno 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS D VIS ON

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

usr REF. ENTER FROM \ ; - 42 (EXECUTIVE J 1 \ 1 . ( ENTER J 1 SENSOR A CATA 1 NO/ SENSOR Vf c c &>^ IMG IN

i , Is- fU"'° /- 1 1 1 TEST SENSOR ! 1 ^^/ WITHIN \K5 LIMIT$ 1 "JX / 4- 1 'NO TKfRD \YES 'SENSOR 8 DATA r< TRY... ^| 4, I - "I" 1 DO NOT USE DATA _ TEST. SENSOR ! 1 2 I

1 ' - ~ 1 - ~ "FLAG SENS3H SENSOR C - DATA -;--'•- 1 — —J - -- 1 lOENTinr .i - - FAILURE TO 1 EXECUTIVE TEST SENSOR ! _ i ... -:.. DO NOT . USE DATA. 1 -•• i 1 SENSOR | DIFFERENCES 1 ' / 'V^••ix.T-'yJ > r ** •» < WITHIN NvNO - ( LIMITS } i (YES YES N. AGREE. OR^NO ~ """" ~ "

VALUE \ COMPUTE AVERAGE OF •- 1 Z VALUES -*-_-• STC.'.E * 1 • .. VALU._E| —

INDICATE FAIL EXECUTIVE

« J

RETl'RH TO A . (-EXECUTIVE -J

Figure 4.20-41 Sensor Malfunction Detection and Voting DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO A -509 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 4.20.5.7 ENGINE LIMIT DETECTION The engine limit flow chart is shown in Figure 4.20-42. Each sensor is tested for range, and if either sensor indicates safe operation, no failure is indicated.

'4. 20.5.-8 «GC»'2?IXFER SPEED AND MEMORY SIZE CAPABILITY The controller software requirements are within its computer speed and memory size capabilities, with spare speed and capacity for further software growth.

The required computer speed is dictated by the amount of processing to be performed in the main computational loop, which has an iteration rate of 50 samples per second. The speed requirements for the other executive functions is a slow rate in comparison to the main loop requirements and does not affect the iteration cycle time requirement? The tabulation of the requirement is shown in Table 4.20-14. This requirement " *^,. "' " - REF. is currently being expanded to 16K of memory. Min. Meet. §ince there are 20 msec in each 50 sample per second iteration available for computation, the HDC-601 performs the loop computations 6 msec faster than required, leaving a spare duty cycle capacity of 30 percent for future, software growth. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE LO/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42

EITHER GOOD! SENSOR i K,} INDICATE SAFE E.SCIHE

1OPERATION

CCSTISUE ENGINE

Figure 4.20-42 Engine Limit Detection THE SINGER COMPANY DATE1.0/20/72 PAGE NO. 4-511 SIMULATION PRODUCTS D VISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF TABLE 4.20-14 COMPUTER MEMORY AND 42 SPEED ESTIMATES

K'.MCRY SIZE TIME FUNCTIONS (17 SIT UOP.O) MS

CONTROLLER BUIIT-IK- TEST 1300 1.5

SENSOR BUILT-IN-TEST 1400 7.5

' ACTUATOR/VALVE EUILT- .IHtTEST .200 0.5

DATA TRANSMISSION _. 200. 0.5

EXECUTIVE PROGRAM 1000 1.0

AUTOMATIC CHECKOUT SUBPROGRAM 500 -

START PREPARATION - SUBPROGRAM 300 - _

FLIC.HT SUBPROGRAM START _ 300 KAINSTAJE ' 1200 3.0 SKUTDO'.N 300

'POST-SHUTDOWN SUBPROGRAM loo "

SUBTOTAL 7000 14.0

GROV/TH 5000 6.0

TOTAL 12000 20.0 DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-512 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 Computer Memory Size Computer memory size is dictated by the capacity required for all programs executed by the controller. The tabulation of this is shown in Table A.20-14. This tabulation shows that there is a 41 percent spare memory capacity for future software growth.

4.20.5.9 HDC-601 PROGRAMMING FEATURES

The cost and time for development(during Phase CD) of the controller control and checkout program is reduced by the off-the-shelf availability of the complete, thoroughly debugged HDC-601 library. Control of the main program and subprograms is optimized for minimum processor time and soft- ware by: 1. Timely processing of vehicle commands using the HDC-601 priority interrupt function. 2. Initiation of main program loop at 20 msec intervals under a lower priority computer clock-driven interrupt 3. Initiation of lower frequency data transmission sorting loops by lower priority computer clock- driven interrupts. 4. Direct memory access of sensor data independent of central processor operation. The two standard software systems available for use in program-

ming, debugging and maintenance of the controller processor THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE NO. 4.513 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 and associated memory are (1) DDP-516 standard software and (2) HDC-601 diagnostic programs.

DDP-516 Standard Software A comprehensive package of DDP-516 programs is available for .use with the HDC-601 and controller as .part of the Honeywell standard product line software. These programs, designed for a wide range of user skills and applications, include the most widely used programming practices and conventions. The soft- ware package includes the following items: DAP-16 Assembly Program, FORTRAN IV Compiler, Utility Routines, Input/Output Routines, and Mathematical Subroutines. For example, the DAP-16 program is used off line in the DDP-516 to convert the controller instructions from the initial assembly language to machine language. Anotheri program simulates all controller programs on a computer with FORTRAN IV capabilities.

HDC-601 Diagnostic Programs In addition to the DDP-516 programs, an extensive package of diagnostic programs for use" with repair depot level is available with the HDC-601. These programs are designed to verify the operation of the processor and memory, and in the case of a faulty operation, to detect and isolate faults to the replaceable subassembly level. The diagnostic package consists of a.computer self-test, a processor module THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. DATE10/20/72 4-514 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. test, and a plated wire module test. The diagnostic tests are performed in conjunction with three pieces of support equipment, the Computer Control Unit (CCU), the ASR-35 Teletype Unit, and a high-speed paper tape reader.

..Compute,r -Se 1 f-Te.st The purpose of this program is to determine whether the processor and memory of the computer are functioning properly and indicate failed subsystems. It is the same as used in flight controller self-tests.

Processor Module Test The purpose of the processor module test is to check all of the functions of the processor and the Computer Control Unit and to isolate functional failures to the board level.

The processor module test is a semiautomatic procedure composed of a manual portion and an automatic portion. The manual portion is used to check the hard-core of the processor, to check any instructions which require operator intervention, . and to initiate the automatic portion. The instructions checked in this manual fashion-are those associated with the hard-core (PAS, SKP, and HLT), the switch testing instructions (SR 1, 2, 3 and 4, SSR and SSS), and the interrupt-associated instructions (END and INK). Instruction repertoire and DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-515

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 definitions are included in Volume 62, Honeywell Report, "Honeywell HDC-601 Digital Computer Programmers Reference Manual".

In addition to the above instructions, the functions of the PPI/PPH switch and power failure/power recovery circuitrj are checked in the manual portion of the processor test.

The automatic portion tests the remaining instructions of the processor. Checkout of the indexing, indirect address- ing, and extended addressing function of the processor is included in .the automatic portion.

The basic approach of the test program is to use the "successive tests" technique.. This technique requires that the individual checks of processor functions be organized in a building-block fashion starting with the hard-core and building^toward the more complex functions. Such ah approach yields an automatic functional isolation of processor failures. Whenever a functional fault is encountered,.the program will • output a message to the ASR Teleprinter informing the operator

which board has failed. ( THE SINGER COMPANY D4TE PAGE NO. . " ,, 10/20/7 ^ SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION 4-516

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. Plated Wire Module Test 42 The purpose of the plated wire module test program is to detect functional faults within a plated wire memory and to isolate these faults to the replaceable subassembly. This program is designed for use with the processor and the plated wire memory. "The program 'te-gfs "tlhe "funcrt tons of "the memory, i.e, addressing, writing, and reading. The plated wire modules test is designed to exercise the memory in two parts. The test is contained on two tapes, one of which checks the lower portion of memory, the other checks the remainder.

The test is designed to detect errors through the use of the following checks: (1) addressing test, (2) data complement, and (3) disturb test. The addressing test is designed to ensure all the address electronics are functioning properly and are addressing the proper memory locations. The memory address is decoded by the X and Y decoder to select the proper word strap, and by the bank selection logic to select one of eight banks. The data complement is designed • to demonstrate the ability of the memory to accept and retain alternate "ones" along any pla.ted wire. The disturb test exercises the memory by alternately reading and writing. The test also attempts to disturb the data stored in one bit

location by writing data of the opposite polarity on either DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N0.4.51? 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

REF. 42 side of this location along the plated wire.

* Through use of the teleprinter a hard copy of the test results is made available to the operator. In the case of a fault in the memory, the printout will Vindicate the faulty subassembly. DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-518 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Ref. Key

4.21 Thermal Protection System (IPS) The orbiter thermal protection and control system consists of two elements. One, the thermal protection system (IPS), is external to the structural shell of the vehicle. It maintains the airframe outer skin within acceptable temperature limits during the vehicle mission. Where internal vehicle special compartments require additional thermal control, the external IPS is augmented by a second element; the internal thermal control system (TCS). The vehicle thermal system also includes the ECLSS, the purge and vent subsystem, and other subsystems See Figure 4. 21-1. The baseline TPS consists of: .(1) "ceramic reusable surface insulation (CRSI) (ceramic panels with an external waterproof coating on a strain-isolation foam pad) directly bonded to the airframe in areas exposed to surface temperature between 650°F and 2500°F; (2) elastomeric reusable surface insulation (ERSI) directly bonded to the airframe in areas exposed to temperatures below 650°F, and (3) reinforced carbon-carbon (RCC) material in the wing leading edge and body nose cap in areas exposed to temperatures above 2500°F. r 4.2 LJlCeramic RSI • I •™ ~ " ' " " '!•••••• • • The ceramic insulation material basically consists of mullite

and silica. '

« Mullite panels - A low-density insulative composite material

formed by coating a matrix of mullite fibers rigidized with

an aluminum-boria silica refractory glass binder. The panel Space Division 4-519 10/20/72

STRUCTURE MOLD LINE S-BAND ANTENNA PENETRATION OUTER WINDSHIELD LEADING EDGE ATTACH

BCC VOUGHT MISSILES AND SPACE CO. RCC REINFORCED CAfltON CARBON p • BO PCF "I" -0.2 TO 0.3 IN. RCC REINFORCED CARBON-CARBON

RCCOXIOATION INHI8ITE1 VOUCH! MISSILES AND SPACE CO. CERAMIC RSI MULLITE (REI-MI SILICON CARBIDE "1" • 0.020 TO 0 040 IN. • PROVIDES MULTIMISSION REUSE ELASTOMERIC RSI ESM 1004X FOAM PAD PD 200

WOVEN QUARTZ FILLER SEAL (APOLLO TYPE) ZIRCONIA INSULATION

BULK INSULATION

TPS DESIGN FEATURES • MINIMUM PLANNED MAINTENANCE DOOR STRUCTURE • MINIMUM TURNAROUND TIME INTERNAL INSULATION • FORGIVING DESIGN • OVER TEMPERATURE TOLERANCE CREW ACCESS DOOR • PASSIVE SYSTEM • MINIMUM WEIGHT • MULTIPLE PURPOSE ELEMENTS.

SILICONE COATED TITANIUM SANDWICH CERAMIC RSI GLASS FABRIC GEN ELEC WULLITE IREl-UI MLjOi -25*0] • ELASTOMERIC RSI FLEXIBLE SEAL »- I? PCF GEN ELEC ESM 1004X FOAMED METHYL PHENYL SILICONE . 650 F MINI - 15 PCF (A..TERNATEK PANEL SIZE (MINI 0 X 8 IN. (T - 7500 F MAX. 1900 PANELS'ZE 74 X 24 IN. (MINI, 36 X 36 IN. (MAX) i • 0w 5a T iOu Ii 9v ImN. f i 1.UH T -650F MAX • LIMITS STRUCTURE TO 350 F // "I"-0.25 TO 0.7S IN, • INSULATESORBITER IN SPACE SS 350 f ALUVINUM • OVER.TEMP CAPABILITY TO 3000 F ^rS • INSULA1 ES ORBITER 'N SPACE • FAIL SAFE ENTRY WITHOUT COATING fives' • OVER-TEMP CAPABILITY AS ABIATOR STRUCTURE • COATtNGONCERAMICRSi / is^ • COATING ON ELASIOMEfl'C INSULATION GEN ELECSR t. f~o.nKf ^- ^ GENEIECSH 126. f • 0088 PCF ELEVON ••T"-003* IN. ' ••r-OOlOIN. STRUCTURE • WATER PROOFS THE RSI • WATER PROOFS TME RSI • PROVIDES TC COAT IN SPACE ta$/« I • PROVIDES TC COAT IN SPACE (a s/f I .__ STRUCTURE • PROVIDES GROUND HANDLING PROTECTION • RSI ADHESIVE MOLD LINE • FOAM PAD GEN ELFC HTV WOMETHYL PHENYL SILICONE GEN ELEC PO ?oo F-MPCF f • 88 PfF FOAMED MEtHYL PHENYL SILICONE -t" - ooto IN. FOAM PAO/CERAUIC RSI -O.OtOIN FOAMPAO'STRUCTURE -I"-030 TO 1.35 IN. TYPICAL CERAMIC RSI-CERAMIC RSI. WOVEN QUARTZ • PROVIDES STRAIN ISOLATOR CERAMIC RSI • ELASTOMERIC RSI, AND - o.oio IN. ELASTOMET RIC RSUSTRUCTURE • COMPENSATESSURFACE IRREGULARITIES • PROVIDES STRUCTURAL TIE PLASMA BARRIER • PROVIDES ADDED INSULA TIQN ELASTOMERIC RSI • ELASTOMERIC RSI PANEL JUNCTION

Figure 4.21-1 THERMAL PROTECTION SYSTEM (TPS) DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE N04"520 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Ref. Key

and pad dimensions are determined by the thermal/structural analyses. • PD-200 pad - A chemically foamed methylphenyl silicone elastr- meric material. This pad provides strain isolation of the CRSI from the aluminum structure and accommodates local surface irregularities. Its outer surface design temperature is 650°F, determined by the allowable bond temperature. The inner surface design temperature is 350°F. This temperature was selected to yield the lowest TPS and aluminum primary structural weight. Analyses indicate that the bottom and chine pad thickness ablative characteristics provide a ceramic panel loss fail safe entry. e SR-2 coating - A waterproof ceramic coating fired at 2500°F on the top and sides of the panel. This coating is chemically compatible with and simular in expansion coefficient to the mullite insulation. The coating provides the necessary thermal control optical characteristics, rain erosion protection, and abrasion resistance for ground handling and atmospheric flight. • e RTV-560 adhesive - A silicone elastomer room-temperature-cured adhesive system used for both panel and pad bonding. Panel-to-panel gaps (0.12 to 0.25 inch) are sized to avoid CRSI panel compressive loads at maximum expansion during entry. The gaps are partially filled with a low-density-quartz expandable gasket to thermally protect the substructure at the base of the joint. THE SINGER COMPANY DATE PAGE N0.4_5n 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Ref.

A panel self-venting system is provided which allows venting to the boundary layer pressure through the panel gaps. It consists of a local interruption in the panel to PD-200 bond line (adjacent to the lower outer edge.) A silicone primer, applied to the lower panel surface, provides a water barrier while allowing venting of internal gases. Two CRSI test prototypes, mounted on simulated air-frame structure and configured to two critical areas of the baseline system, have been successfully tested to withstand 100 orbiter thermal environment cycles. During the test series the prototypes were also subjected to a dynamic/ acoustic energy spectrum of 163 db for the equivalent of 25 missions. "4.21.2 Elastomeric RSI , ERSI (ESM1004X) is used as the primary IPS on the orbiter upper surfaces where lower temperatures ( < 650°F) are experienced. Using an elastomer instead of a ceramic results in a IPS weight reduction of 3500 pounds. It is a flexible, open-cell structure material possessing good low-temperature flexural properties, and is attached to the airfesame in coated sheets with RTV-560 bond. The ESM1004X is coated with an elastomeric silicone resin (for waterproofing) pigmented with titanium dioxide and carbon black (for thermal control). • It is an impact-resistant, easily repairable material, which minimizes the susceptability to handling damage. The ESM1004X is similar to the material used on Minuteman reentry vehicle. Its thermal stability for 100 missions at 650°F has been demonstrated by tests. No difficulty is anticipated in extending its capacity to 500 missions. Excellent coating stability has been demonstrated DATE 10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-522 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Ref. Key

to peak temperatures of 750°F in a vacuum maintained below 500 microns. 4.21.3 Reinforced Carbon-Carbon (RCC) Reinforced carbon-carbon (RCC) materials are used for wing leading edge and body nose cap applications. The RCC leading edge elements are approximately 30 inches long, with the radii variations illustrated. Adjacent elements are downstream-lapped for spanwise expansion capability and utilize common attachment points to the prime structure. The joints are designed for individual leading edge element removal for maintainability. Cross-radiation effects are used to reduce maximum temperature and associated thermal stress, wherever possible. High-temperature bulk insulation backs up the RCC-material to protect the structure. A silicone carbide oxidation inhibitor covers 100 percent of the RCC surface. The RCC vehicle body nose cap is simular to the leading edge in material details, construction, insulation, and attachment. The RCC material (and oxidation inhibitor) has been tested for 100 thermal cycles. 4..21.4 Special TPS Areas 4/21.4".! "TPS Outer Window The TPS window employs a pane of fused silica (CGW 7940) to act as a heat shield. The windows, nominally 30 inches wide and 30 inches high, are subjected to a maximum temperature of 1200°F. They are sealed with a wire-mesh core Jacketed with a woven ceramic cloth to prevent plasma impingement on internal structure. The outer window is part of a three-pane redundant system where the middle crew cabin window pane (fused silica for thermal protection) is also sealed to contain cabin pressure. The inner crew cabin pane is the primary DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO. 4-523 in/?n/7? SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

Ref. Key

pressure-containing window. 4.21.4;2 seals State-of-the-are Apollo CSM seal materials are generally -utrln'^-ed-for--do-ors'andvhfftches. The-el'evon-requires the use of high- temperature metals in the seal contact area to ensure adequate abrasion resistance. The upper seal panel is titanium with a metallic mesh seal simular to the seals used on the X-15 aircraft. It consists of an Inconel 602 mesh encased in an Inconel foil sleeve. This concept was proven by test to be reusable for 100 missions at 1200 °F during Phase B development testing. There are no proven fully reusable seal concepts •for 1800°F environments in the lower eleven seal area. The current approach is to use a woven quartz plasma shield upstream to protect the metallic mesh seal inside the cavity be reducing the seal temperature. An alternate internal flexible longitudinal total pressure may be used to preclude outer seal leakage. 4.21.5 Rationale Not Required.

4.21.6 Reference • ; j , ; ; j • j : > i ; : ; 166 Pages 3-32 - 3-51 - --, . DATE THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE 10/20/72 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

4.22 Thermal Control System (TCS) The TCS basically .is passive and integrally deisgned with the o TPS. It consists essentially of insulation (TG 15000) heat sinks and optical coatings, with local active elements as required to maintain vehicle compartments within allowable temperature limits. Where individual components require closer control (heaters, cold plates, etc.), details 7"(.. are given in the applicable system description. FIGURE 4J8-1 shows the salient features of the TCS which is similar to that used on the Apollo CSM. The various subsystem components have been grouped essentially in the cabin area and the aft equipment bay with the required insulation located along the basic structure. This arrangement maximizes energy exchange among the subsystem components and facilitates equipment maintainability. Maximum utilization of existing heat sources 'and sinks to minimize make-up heater requirements and to achieve a flexible TCS design. Thermal conditioning is most critical for the vehicle in high inclination orbits where the vehicle is placed in an adverse attitude that is maintained for a long period. This creates cold soak and hot soak conditions that may require special operation on the part of the crew. The cold soak condition results in temperatures that may go _ _.... below the "glass-transition" temperature (-170°F) of the foamed pad • , and room-temperature-vulcanized (RTV) bond, thus causing a ductility ; loss and sensitivity to thermal and load deformation. There are two aspects of cold soak, both concerned with maintaining ceramic RSI - attachment integrity. These occur during (a) on-orbit periods under no loads relating to a "no mission interrupt" for thermal conditioning design approach and (b) entry heating with initial low RSI bondline temperatures DATE10/20/72 THE SINGER COMPANY PAGE NO.4-525 SIMULATION PRODUCTS DIVISION

REV. BINGHAMTON. NEW YORK REP. NO.

relating to a "no attitude constraint" for thermal conditioning design approach. Hot soak is a related preentry thermal conditioning aspect. Internal subsystems that are sensitive to the hot-soak orbital condition are currently located in the vehicle fuselage, where temperatures are primarily influenced ty the elastomeric RSI thermal control coating properties. As discussed, thermal coatings fot the elastomeric RSI which

exhibit an a s/?: =0.4 are already developed. 4.22.1 Rationale Not tequired. 4.22.2 Reference 166,,Pages 3-32 - 3-51 4-526 10/20/72

0070 IN: FIBERGLASS LAMINATE LINtR (REMOVABLE). (X lf « 0.4 ' 08 IN. TG 15000 t 003 IN. LAMINATED HEAT SINK

PRESSURE SCNSiTivE TAPCIMETALIZEO)

RETAINER POST AND WASHER SILiCONI 0UBBER DOOR SEAL TYPICAL HYDRAULIC MAIN LANDING LINE INSULATION INSTALLATION GEAR AFT PAY LOAD BAV LINER (HEATERS)

OWL (ELASTOMERICASi) AFT EQUIP SAY ft eft* 0.4 (AVIONICS & APU)

RAM AI (COOLING AIR: AVIONICS T AVIONICS EAT SINKS, HEATERS)

1.0 IN. TG 15000 ALUMINUM (BODY AREA) WIRE LACING STRUCTURE FRAME

0070 IN. FIBERGLASS LAMINATt L'NER

?£IN.TO 1&000 —^ffify, " \'i^-4ffi//$j

STRUCTURE -^r \

FORWARD PAYLOAO BAY AREA (FORWARD EQUIP BAY)

ll.~G;>S!«AB«»lCl-USED WHERE MAXIMUM THERMAl CONTROL SYSTEM ELEMEHTS TEVPf ^ATunt IS LESS THAN 6SO F. INSULATION fajT€CTS SUBSYSTEMS FDOM ATMQS HEAT SINKS FVlERiC A'lO i»*CE ENViROdUENTS THERMAL CONTROL COATINGS HEATERS ISOLATORS 1.IIN.1G1MOO 0 06 IN. NYLON

THERMAL CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN FEATURES BEt-'SA9Lf SURFACE INSULATION PASSIVE SYSTEM - HIGH RELIABILITY MAXIMUM UTILIZATION LON OF EXISTING HEAT SOURCES *%6'»5LYivitiE'-ii5£b Vo TAILOR AND SINKS BULK INSULATION THICKNESS MATERIALS AND DESIGN CHOSEN FOR MINIMUM MAINTENANCE RETAINING POST AND REQUIREMENTS WASHER IKPQSC3 VEHICLE SPACES TO REDUCE CABIN INSULATED FOR ENTRY MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE. BASELINE: (TwALL* "OFMAXI Oc'« •O&ONCEaAWiCftSI. Cl*II • 0.4ON AND SPACE (NO CONDENSATION} TYPICAL INSULATION INSTALLATION LACING ELASTOVERIC RSI. Qs'< < 0.4 ON PAYLOAO FORWARD RCS PROPELLANT ETC. (ALL INSULATION VENTED) BAY iSTEfliOn. HIGH I COATINGS USED ON STORAGE AREA SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS.

4.22-1 THEW-WL CONTROL SYSTEMi'(TCS)'